JP2022118131A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing display control.

SOLUTION: A drawing list to which required information for displaying images is set is provided from a performance CPU 82 to a performance LSI 85. A plurality of drawing lists may be provided to display images corresponding to one update timing. In each of respective display devices 41, 43, 44, one drawing list in which image data to be used is set intensively may be provided. When the drawing list is provided, a prior transfer control part 94 reads image data designated in the drawing list from a memory module 83 to a VRAM 86. In this case, when the image data have already been read into the VRAM 86, no reading from the memory module 83 is performed. When the prior transfer control part 94 completes prior transfer of image data, it sets identification information corresponding to an area at the transfer destination to the drawing list.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A pachinko game machine, a slot machine, and the like are known as a kind of game machine. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display control.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides display means for displaying an image,
image information storage means for storing image data in advance;
an instruction control means for providing instruction information for instructing the contents of an image to be displayed on the display means;
display control means for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data in accordance with the content instructed in the instruction information;
with
The display control means is
first control means for executing first control necessary for displaying an image on the display means in accordance with predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means;
a second control means for executing a second control necessary for displaying an image on the display means according to the predetermined instruction information;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, display control can be preferably performed.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the main display device. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the main display device; FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a variable display unit for explaining a first sub-display device and a second sub-display device; (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the movement aspect of each sub display apparatus. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for a jackpot generation lottery or the like. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the distribution side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing table setting processing executed by the distribution side MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the electrical composition of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by CPU for production|presentation. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing for display control performed by CPU for production|presentation. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of registers used when drawing processing is executed by a 2D control unit and a 3D control unit; 4A to 4C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a 2D rendering list; FIG. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a 3D rendering list; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing 2D drawing processing executed by a 2D control unit; 4 is a flowchart showing 3D drawing processing executed by a 3D control unit; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how drawing data is created along with the execution of 3D drawing processing; (a) to (c) are time charts for explaining the timing at which drawing data is created and the timing at which image data is transferred in advance. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pre-transfer storage area and a post-transfer storage area; (a) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an advance transfer area|region, (b) explanatory drawing for demonstrating an identification information counter. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a search table; FIG. 8A to 8D are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the address information of the drawing list and the address ID of the search table are rewritten; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing drawing list output processing executed by a performance CPU; FIG. (a) to (e) The image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read out to the pre-transfer area at least at the timing when the effect for the next game round can be started. It is a time chart which shows a state. 10 is a flowchart showing advance transfer processing executed by an advance transfer control unit; 7 is a flow chart showing address information rewriting processing executed by a pre-transfer control unit; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a file table; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between a VRAM and an index area; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an index table; 4 is a flow chart showing transfer execution processing executed by a transfer controller; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of one drawing list in which image data corresponding to each display device are aggregated and set; 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining execution target tables for display control; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing drawing list creation processing executed by an effect CPU; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for outputting an image signal to each sub-display device; FIG. (a) to (e) How one piece of drawing data is created to display one frame of image on each sub display device, and each sub display device using the one piece of drawing data FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how an image for one frame is displayed in each of the . (a) to (d) are time charts showing how image signals are output to respective display devices. 4 is a flowchart showing writing processing executed by a 2D control unit; 6 is a flowchart showing drawing processing to a drawing area for sub-display executed by a 2D control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing signal output processing executed by the second display circuit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an execution target table for display control during a displacement effect period; (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the right hitting notification image displayed on each display apparatus. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of data stored in the memory module, and (b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents displayed as a right-handed notification image on the sub side. . (a) to (d) are time charts showing how the rotation speed of the sub-side hitting-right notification image is changed according to the displacement state of the sub-display device. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for right-handed alert|reporting performed by CPU for production|presentation. (a) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the details of effects using the rotation period image. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of the rotation movement display performed by CPU for production|presentation. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a method of creating image data for displaying an image for a rotation period at the pachinko machine design stage, and (e) explanation of the contents of data stored in a memory module. It is an explanatory view for doing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an event that is a target of execution of anomaly notification; 4(a) to 4(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a display mode of an abnormality notification image. FIG. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a display mode of an abnormality notification image during a period in which an effect of displacing the sub-display device is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process of the command for information performed by CPU for production|presentation. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for information performed by CPU for production|presentation. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of data stored in a memory module; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of normal moving image data, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of special moving image data. (a) to (c) are time charts showing how moving image data is decoded using a period during which an image using attached image data is displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the use setting process of the moving image data performed by CPU for production|presentation. 4 is a flowchart showing decoding processing executed by a video decoder; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing area for sub-display in the second embodiment; 6 is a flow chart showing drawing data synthesizing processing for sub-display executed by a 3D control unit; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing address information rewriting processing executed by an advance transfer control unit according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing drawing list output processing executed by a performance CPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing advance transfer processing executed by an advance transfer control unit;

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A game board 21 is mounted on the inner frame 13 . FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 21. FIG.

An inner rail portion 22 and an outer rail portion 23 are attached to the game board 21 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism (not shown) attached to the bottom of the game board 21 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. The game ball shooting mechanism shoots game balls by manually operating a shooting operation device 24 provided on the front door frame 14 .

The game board 21 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, etc. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when a ball enters the first working port 33 or when a ball enters the second working port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , when a ball enters the general prize winning port 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. executed.

In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may be the first operation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 21a is provided at the bottom of the game board 21, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 21a. The game board 21 is also provided with a large number of nails 21b for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of game balls into the out port 21a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 21 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. The result of the lottery is clearly indicated through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the main display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface of the main display device 41. In the special figure display part 37a, the variable display of the pattern is performed by performing a jackpot occurrence lottery with the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, as a result of stopping after the variable display of the pattern is performed, a display corresponding to the result of the big win generation lottery is performed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display part 37b.

More specifically, the main display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by an effect control device 80 described later. The main display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the main display device 41, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 37a based on the winning of the first operation port 33 or the winning of the second operation port 34, the variable display of the pattern is performed according to it. will be That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display section 37a, the variable display is performed in the main display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in a game turn in which the result of the jackpot generation lottery is the jackpot result, the symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line set in advance on the main display device 41 .

The display contents of the main display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIGS. 3(a) to 3(j) are diagrams individually showing symbols displayed in a variable manner on the main display device 41, and FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b) show the display surface of the main display device 41. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIGS. 3( a ) to 3 ( j ), the patterns, which are one type of pattern, include nine main patterns with numbers “1” to “9”, and shell-shaped patterns. It is composed of a sub pattern consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display surface of the main display device 41 is provided with three pattern rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the display surface is designed to stop-display three symbols for each row of symbols. It has become. Also, five effective lines are set on the display surface, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a big win moving image is displayed as a normal big win result or a 15R probability variable big win result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are attached. The main pattern corresponds to the "non-specific pattern". When a 15R probability variable jackpot result occurs, a combination of the same specific symbols or a combination of the same non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed. Also, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result to be described later, the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state in which a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, A demonstration video is displayed.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are variably displayed on the main display device 41 is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary, and includes the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns variably displayed on the main display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

Also, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33 and 34, the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a and the main display device 41, and the predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round.

Returning to the description of FIG. 2, when a jackpot is won in a jackpot generation lottery based on winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or winning a prize in the second operating port 34, it is possible to win a prize to the special electric prize winning device 32. switch to the open/close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 21, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It has become. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. Note that winning is not impossible in the closed state, but a state in which winning is less likely to occur than in the open state may be employed. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is executed on the main display device 41 .

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. The center frame 42 provided to surround the main display device 41 in the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 21, so that the game area PA is variable. An upper area that is an area above a predetermined height position of the display unit 36, a left area that is an area that is continuous with the upper area below and to the left of the variable display unit 36, and an upper area that is below the variable display unit 36. A right area that is an area to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area that is an area below the variable display unit 36 that is continuous below the left area and the right area. and . In this case, the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 are provided in the lower region. In addition, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage 42a formed in the center frame 42, and the game ball discharged from the center of the stage 42a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 enters the first operating port 33. In addition, the entrance portion of the guide passage that allows the game ball to be guided onto the stage 42a is formed so as to allow the game ball to enter from the left area. Therefore, when the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side region, the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side region. of game balls are likely to enter. On the other hand, the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided in the right area. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, if the shooting operation has been performed so that the game ball flows down the left area, it is necessary to change the shooting operation mode so that the game ball flows down the right area. There is

Here, the variable display unit 36 is provided with a first sub-display device 43 and a second sub-display device 44 in addition to the main display device 41 . These first sub-display device 43 and second sub-display device 44 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the variable display unit 36 for explaining the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. FIG.

Both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are configured as liquid crystal display devices having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by an effect control device, which will be described later. Note that the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are not limited to liquid crystal display devices, and may be other display devices having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. may be a dot matrix display. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same type of display device is used for the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. Different types of display devices may be used for the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, such that one is a liquid crystal display device and the other is a dot matrix display device.

The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are display devices having the same shape, and the resolution of the display surface, the shape of the display surface, and the size of the display surface are the same. Both the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are rectangular. The display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are both narrower than the display surface of the main display device 41. The total area of the display surface of the device 44 is also smaller than the display surface of the main display device 41 . In other words, the long side of the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 is shorter than any side of the rectangular display surface of the main display device 41, and the long side of the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 is is shorter than the dimension of any side of the rectangular display surface of the main display device 41 . As a result, even if the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are provided separately from the main display device 41, the player's attention to the main display device 41 is extremely reduced. It is possible to prevent this.

Both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged in front of the display surface of the main display device 41 . The first sub-display device 43 is provided with a first driving unit 45 for sliding and rotating the first sub-display device 43 in front of the main display device 41. is provided with a second drive unit 46 for sliding and rotating the second sub-display device 44 in front of the main display device 41 .

The first drive unit 45 is provided on the back side of the center frame 42 above a rectangular opening 42 b that exposes the display surface of the main display device 41 in the center frame 42 toward the front of the game board 21 . The second drive unit 46 is provided on the back side of the center frame 42 below the opening 42b. That is, the center frame 42 is provided with a pair of upper and lower drive units 45 and 46 .

The first drive unit 45 and the second drive unit 46 have the same configuration. Specifically, each of the drive units 45 and 46 has drive rails 45a and 46a extending in the horizontal direction, and can reciprocate in the horizontal direction along the drive rails 45a and 46a, and each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is driven. Slide drive motors 45c, 46c for vertically reciprocating the supporting members 45b, 46b, and rotationally driving the respective sub display devices 43, 44 rotatably supported by the supporting members 45b, 46b. Rotation drive motors 45d and 46d are provided. The display surfaces of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 face the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the same direction as the display surface of the main display device 41, and are supported by rotation drive motors 45d and 46d. When 45d and 46d are driven, the pachinko machine 10 rotates with the front-rear direction as the rotation axis.

The support members 45b and 46b are elongated plates, and are mounted on the slide drive motors 45c and 46c so that their longitudinal direction is the vertical direction. In this case, the combination of the first sub-display device 43 and the rotary drive motor 45d is mounted on the lower end side of the support member 45b of the first drive unit 45, and the second display device is mounted on the upper end side of the support member 46b of the second drive unit 46. A combination of a sub-display device 44 and a rotary drive motor 46d is mounted. When the slide drive motors 45c and 46c are driven to move the support members 45b and 46b in the vertical direction, the support members 45b and 46b move in the vertical direction, and are integrated with the support members 45b and 46b accordingly. The combination of the sub-display devices 43, 44 and the rotary drive motors 45d, 46d moves in the vertical direction. Further, when the slide drive motors 45c and 46c are driven to move in the lateral direction along the drive rails 45a and 46a, the slide drive motors 45c and 46c move in the lateral direction. , 46c, the combination of the sub-displays 43, 44, support members 45b, 46b and rotary drive motors 45d, 46d moves laterally.

The state shown in FIG. 5 is a state in which the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at their initial positions. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 is placed on the upper side of the opening 42b of the center frame 42 in a landscape orientation, and the lower half of the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 is displayed on the main display device 41. The front part of the surface is exposed from the opening 42b and the upper half is hidden behind the center frame 42. - 特許庁The second sub-display device 44 is also arranged on the lower side of the opening 42b of the center frame 42 in a landscape orientation, and the upper half of the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 is the display surface of the main display device 41. is exposed from the opening 42b in front of the center frame 42, and the lower half is hidden behind the center frame 42. As shown in FIG. When both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are vertically separated from each other. Also, in a situation where both sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 in the horizontal direction are the same. As a result, the entire bottom surface of the first sub-display device 43 faces the entire top surface of the second sub-display device 44 .

FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of a movement mode of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. FIG. When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are placed at their initial positions, the slide drive motors 45c and 46c are driven to move the support members 45b and 46b downward. As the first sub-display device 43 moves downward, the second sub-display device 44 moves upward while maintaining the landscape orientation. Then, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are brought closer to each other until the lower surface of the first sub-display device 43 in landscape orientation and the upper surface of the second sub-display device 44 in landscape orientation face each other at a short distance. 6(a), the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are vertically arranged side by side. In this case, the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are arranged so as to appear to be continuous, and these display surfaces form one square or rectangular surface. It will be done. This position is the first side-by-side position. In the first side-by-side position, the boundary between the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 exists so as to extend in the horizontal direction. In addition, a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at the first side-by-side position is provided, and in the distribution control device 70 described later, the detection result of the detection sensor is Based on this, it is specified that each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 has been arranged at the first side-by-side position, and the drive state of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c is stopped.

In the state of FIG. 6A, the slide drive motor 45c of the first drive unit 45 is driven to move the first sub-display device 43 rightward and downward, and the rotary drive motor 45d of the first drive unit 45 is The first sub-display device 43 is driven to rotate clockwise, and the slide drive motor 46c of the second drive unit 46 is driven to move the second sub-display device 44 leftward and upward. When the rotary drive motor 46d of the drive unit 46 is driven to rotate the second sub-display device 44 clockwise, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are moved to the second juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. 6(b). is placed in the In the second side-by-side position, each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 takes a vertically long posture, and the left surface of the vertically long first sub-display device 43 and the right surface of the vertically long second sub-display device 44 are close to each other. They will face each other at a distance. In this case, the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are arranged so as to appear to be continuous, and these display surfaces form one square or rectangular surface. It will be done. At the second side-by-side position, the boundary between the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 exists so as to extend in the vertical direction. In addition, a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at the second side-by-side position is provided, and the distribution control device 70 described later detects the detection result of the detection sensor. Based on this, it is specified that each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at the second side-by-side position, and the drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c and the rotation drive motors 45d and 46d are stopped. Further, in addition to the first side-by-side position and the second side-by-side position, a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the initial position and each intermediate position described later is provided, and the distribution control device 70 described later detects each The drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c and the rotation drive motors 45d and 46d are stopped based on the detection results of the sensors.

In addition to the initial position, the first side-by-side position, and the second side-by-side position, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial position shown in FIG. 5 and the first side-by-side position shown in FIG. There is a position where each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at an intermediate position with respect to the set position. In addition, there is a position where the first sub-display device 43 moves to the right and the second sub-display device 44 moves to the left from the second side-by-side position shown in FIG. 6(b). ing. In the case of the former, these intermediate positions are such that the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are separated in the vertical direction. The positional relationship is such that the sub-display device 44 is laterally spaced apart. In addition, when the first sub-display device 43 is arranged at the initial position, the second sub-display device 44 corresponds to the position corresponding to the first side-by-side position, the position corresponding to the second side-by-side position, and each intermediate position. In addition, when the second sub-display device 44 is arranged at the initial position, the first sub-display device 43 is positioned at the position corresponding to the first side-by-side position and at the second side-by-side position. They may be arranged at corresponding positions and positions corresponding to each intermediate position.

In a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at positions other than the initial positions, the supporting members 45b and 46b are exposed from the opening 42b of the center frame 42. FIG. In this case, since the support members 45b and 46b are formed colorless and transparent, the support members 45b and 46b can be made inconspicuous and the image displayed on the main display device 41 can be supported. It is possible to avoid being hidden by the members 45b and 46b.

As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 21 configured as described above. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51 . A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 55 bulging forward and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged below the window portion 51 . An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

A main control device 60, a distribution control device 70, and an effect control device 80 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁In addition, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism including a payout device 68, a power supply and firing control device 65, and a payout control device 66. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Main controller 60>
The main control device 60 has a main control board 61 that controls the main game. In the main controller 60, the board box housing the main control board 61 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. can be As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box are inseparably connected, and the structure of the connecting part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and the adhesive layer to be adhered when peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the board box is conceivable.

An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 . The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

As the ROM 63, memory means (that is, non-volatile memory means) is used that allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data and does not require external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be implemented as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as the structure mounted.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power supply and launch control device 65 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62 . The power supply and launch control device 65 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Operating power is supplied to the main control board 61 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 61 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 66 and the effect control device 80 which will be described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 62 and the power supply and launch control device 65 . In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 62, so that the MPU 62 executes processing for power failure. It becomes possible to

Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 62 . As a part of the various sensors, detection provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning ball entry part such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the through gate 35 A sensor is included, and the MPU 62 makes a prize winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section. In addition, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot generation lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on the winning of the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and executes a reach generation lottery and a variable display time determination lottery for each game round. do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 62 will be described.

The MPU 62 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display of the special figure display section 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the main display device 41, the display setting of the normal figure display section 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot generation lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type such as the 15R probability variable jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the main display device 41 fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the special figure display unit 37a and the main display device 41 and a variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time in . Furthermore, it is decided to use the general electric role release counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electric role 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the electric role open state. These counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 64a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 64b as an acquired information storage means when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. stored in

The reserved storage area 64b comprises a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4. In addition, each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of →third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are retained and stored. . It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and at the start of one game round is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

The values of random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the ROM 63 as a success/failure table. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as the lottery mode in the jackpot generating lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is twenty. As long as the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the jackpot generating lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34.

As a mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 is relatively high and low during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or the winning of the large winning opening occurs. Continue until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the large winning opening. This continues until there are 6 of them.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 24 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 67 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the big winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the large winning opening is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of openings and closings of the large winning opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening time for one opening, and the maximum number of winnings for one opening are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode. , the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 increases from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening and closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is substantially configured not to win. should be For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit winning number is set shorter than the opening time for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, the game ball is opened once. It is also possible to set the product of the firing period and the upper limit winning number longer than the opening time. In addition, even if the shooting interval of the game ball and the opening time of the large winning hole once are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no prize is actually awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 .

As the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, when compared with the situation where the game ball is continued to be shot in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the normal operation of the second operating port 34 A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the electronic device 34a is in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role open lottery using the general electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5 ), but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric role 34a is in the open state is set more than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role open state is won. is set for a long time. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the general electric role item 34a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time required for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is more likely than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. Then, when a winning to the second operation port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. In addition, the time secured after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through gate 35 In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time to be executed are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected than the low-frequency support mode, or the average reserved time is shorter. may be Furthermore, the number of openings is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured after one electric accessary item open lottery is performed and the next electric accessary item open lottery is performed (that is, , Shorten one time fluctuation display time in the normal diagram display unit 38a), shorten the average time of the securing time and increase the winning probability, apply any one condition or any combination of conditions , the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 63 as a distribution table. And, as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, and a 15R probability variable jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition.

The explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is that the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result of the big-hit generation lottery results in winning the big-hit state, and the state shifts to the big-hit state.

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result of the big-hit generation lottery results in winning the big-hit state, and the state shifts to the big-hit state.

In relation to each game state, the normal game state means a state in which the jackpot occurrence lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the normal jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot results. , and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect on the main display device 41. - 特許庁The expected effect is that the main display device 41 is equipped with a variable display of symbols, and in game rounds in which the opening and closing execution mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 is a high frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is a special display. In the resulting game machine, before the variable display of the symbols on the main display device 41 is started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, the player is made to think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result. Refers to the display state for

There are two kinds of expected effects, namely, the ready-to-win effect and an announcement effect for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect and the special display result in the stage before the ready-to-win effect occurs.

In the ready-to-win effect, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is realized. A display state is included in which combinations of possible ready-to-win patterns are displayed, and in that state, patterns are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining pattern rows. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to perform a ready-to-win effect. , the combination of the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in a reduced size or not displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to perform the ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, for the ready-to-win effect, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is displayed on a preset active line within the display surface of the main display device 41 as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols. A ready-to-win line is formed by stop-displaying a combination of ready-to-win patterns in which there is a possibility of establishing a ready-to-win pattern, and under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed, patterns are variably displayed by a final stop pattern row.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 4 will be described. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the main symbols having the same number on the lines L1 to L5, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the middle symbol row Z2. It becomes a reach production by being beaten. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbols having the same number as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol ends.

In the advance notice effect, after the start of the variable display of the symbols on the display surface of the main display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some of the symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, the background image may be in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the patterns on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. This notice effect can occur in any game round when the ready-to-win effect is performed and when the ready-to-win effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win effect is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in the game times when the open/close execution mode is entered. In addition, in game rounds in which the open/close execution mode is not entered, the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63 is referenced, and the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. is executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice effect is made not by the main control device 60 but by the distribution control device 70 .

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the special figure display section 37a and the variation display time of the design in the main display device 41 in the MPU 62. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process, which will be described later. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display unit 37a and the start of the variation in the design by the main display device 41. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

For example, the general electric utility item release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electrical role 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electrical role release counter C4.

As shown in FIG. 7, the output side of the MPU 62 is connected with a payout control device 66 and a power source and a launch control device 65 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 66, for example, on the basis of the prize winning determination result to the prize winning ball entering portion. The payout control device 66 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 68 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 . A firing permission command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the power supply and firing control device 65 based on the fact that the firing operation device 24 is being operated. The power supply and shooting control device 65 drives the game ball shooting mechanism 67 based on the shooting permission command received from the main control device 60 to shoot the game ball toward the game area PA.

The special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and the MPU 62 directly controls the display of these special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a. In other words, display control of the special figure display section 37a is executed in the MPU 62 at each game round. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the universal electric accessory 34a is specified, the MPU 62 performs display control of the universal diagram display unit 38a.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to a special electric prize driving unit that opens and closes the opening and closing door of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34. . That is, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the special electric prize driving section so that the big prize opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electrical role 34a is won in the open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the general electrical role driving unit so that the general electrical role 34a is opened and closed. A distribution control device 70 is connected to the output side of the MPU 62 , and various commands for effects are transmitted to the distribution control device 70 .

Here, processing executed by the MPU 62 will be described. The processing of the MPU 62 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing main processing. In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the main display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. In step S102, access to the RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 62 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and firing control device 65 is manually operated, and in the subsequent step S105, whether or not the power failure flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". determine whether Also, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. At step S108, the RAM 64 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 64 is set to an initial value such as the initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the distribution control device 70 in order to recognize the current game state. do.

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the RAM 64, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec). First, in step S201, power failure information storage processing is executed. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed.

In subsequent step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric role release counter C4, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Afterwards, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S203, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In subsequent step S205, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the RAM 64 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to various driving units is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric prize driving unit is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set Stop the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information to switch the general electrical role 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electrical role drive unit is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the subsequent step S209, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, the signal received from each winning detection sensor is read, and the presence or absence of winning to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35 is determined. Execute the process to identify the .

In the following step S210, a timer update process is executed for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 64. FIG. In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed. In a situation where the shooting operation to the shooting operation device 24 is continued, as already explained, one game ball is shot at a predetermined shooting cycle of 0.6 sec.

In the subsequent step S212, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208, disconnection of each prize detection sensor and opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 are checked.

In the following step S213, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game round and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed. In the special special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs in a situation where the number of reservation information stored in the reservation storage area 64b is less than the upper limit number, The numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the point of time is stored as reserved information in the reserved storage area 64b in chronological order. In addition, in the special figure special electric control processing, on the condition that the reservation information is not during the game rotation and the opening and closing execution mode and the reservation information is stored, it is determined whether the reservation information corresponds to the jackpot winning. A lottery process and a distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the reservation information corresponds to when the jackpot winning is supported are executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process, but if the reservation information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, whether the reservation information corresponds to the reach occurrence Along with executing a reach determination process for determining , a process for selecting the variation display time of the game round is performed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In this case, the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the occurrence of reach occurrence is read from the ROM 63, and the read fluctuation display time table and the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that timing are used for this time. Determines the variable display time of game rounds. Then, a variation command including information on the variation display time of the determined game round and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and variation of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a start the display. As a result, one game round is started, and the effect for the game round is started on the special figure display section 37a and the main display device 41.例文帳に追加Also, the MPU 62 starts measuring the variable display time when it transmits the variable command and the type command.

In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the fluctuation display time corresponding to the game round has elapsed during the execution of one game round, the special figure display unit 37a is the jackpot occurrence lottery process and distribution of the game round this time A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and measurement of the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is maintained over the fixed display time. When the fixed display time elapses, if the current game round corresponds to the result of losing, a new game round is started on condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 64b. Execute the process. If the hold information is not stored, it waits until the hold information is newly acquired.

On the other hand, if the game round this time corresponds to the result of the big win, a process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the distribution control device 70 . Also, in the special figure special electric control process, the process for starting each round game and the process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and a close command that indicates that the round game is terminated is transmitted to the distribution control device 70. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening and closing execution mode is terminated, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and the jackpot generation lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode and the support mode are set. process. In the opening/closing execution mode, an opening period occurs over a period of, for example, 3 seconds, and an effect is executed that allows the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode has occurred during the opening period. After that, a round game in which opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed is executed a predetermined number of times. After the round game is executed a predetermined number of times, an ending period occurs over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and an effect is executed that allows the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode will end during this ending period. .

After performing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in timer interrupt processing, normal figure general electric control processing is performed in step S214. In the general map general electric control process, when the prize to the through gate 35 is generated, the processing for acquiring the reservation information on the general map side is executed, and when the reservation information on the general map side is stored Then, open determination is performed for the reservation information, and processing for performing the production for the normal map is performed with the open determination as a trigger. Moreover, based on the result of open determination, the process which opens and closes the universal electrical accessory 34a of the 2nd operation|movement opening 34 is performed.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the step S213 and step S214 immediately before, set the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure pending display unit 37b. At the same time, output information is set for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the reservation information corresponding to the general pattern display section 38a in the general pattern reservation display section 38b. Further, in step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, along with setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a, the display content of the normal figure display unit 38a Set the output information for updating.

In the subsequent step S216, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 66 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing is executed for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result. Also, in step S217, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In subsequent step S218, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Distribution control device 70>
Next, the distribution control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 7, the distribution control device 70 executes effects executed by the various display devices 41, 43, 44, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 based on commands received from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Based on the distribution control board 71 having a function to determine the contents, the distribution control board 71 and the control of the production control device 80 described later, various drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 and an output integration board 72 having a function of consolidating and outputting the drive signals.

The distribution control board 71 has an MPU 73 . The MPU 73 includes a ROM 74 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 73, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 74. A RAM 75, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

As the ROM 74, memory means (that is, non-volatile memory means) is used, which allows random access when reading the control program and fixed value data and does not require external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the type of memory used as the ROM 74 is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 74, and the RAM 75 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be implemented as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as the structure mounted.

The MPU 73 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 73 . The production control device 80 is connected to the output side of the MPU 73, and the output integration board 72 is connected. Incidentally, the electrical connection between the distribution control board 71 and the output integration board 72 consists of a distribution side connector 76a provided on the distribution control board 71 and an output integration side connector 76b provided on the output integration board 72. are connected without intervening signal lines. The distribution-side connector 76a and the output integration-side connector 76b are electrically connected detachably.

The output integrated board 72 includes a motor drive circuit 77 and a harness connector 78 . The motor drive circuit 77 operates a slide drive motor 45c and a rotation drive motor 45d for moving the first sub-display device 43 and a second sub-display device based on drive data output from the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71. It is a circuit for outputting drive signals to a slide drive motor 46c and a rotation drive motor 46d for moving 44 . The MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 outputs drive data corresponding to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d to the motor drive circuit 77 at corresponding timings. The motor drive circuit 77 is electrically connected to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d individually, and the drive motor 45c corresponding to the drive data received from the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71. , 45d, 46c and 46d are individually driven and controlled.

A harness connector 78 is provided in the middle of an electrical path for outputting signals from the motor drive circuit 77 to the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d. In addition, the harness connector 78 is provided in an electric path for outputting a signal from the light emitting circuit 87 provided in the effect control board 81 of the effect control device 80 to be described later to the display light emitting unit 53, and in the effect control board 81. It exists in the middle position of the electric path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker section 54 . As already explained, the driving motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d are mounted on the game board 21, and the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 are mounted on the front door frame 14. FIG. Signal lines for outputting signals to the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 are all relayed by a relay board provided on the game board 21. FIG. In this case, each of these signal lines is provided as a harness in which one end is integrated into one connector member and the other end is also integrated into one connector member. One end of the harness is detachably electrically connected to the harness connector 78 of the output integration board 72, and the other end of the harness is detachably connected to the harness connector provided on the relay board. are electrically connected in good condition.

Light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the performance control device 80 as will be described in detail later. In this case, the signal line for outputting the signal to the display light emitting unit 53 and the signal line for outputting the signal to the speaker unit 54 are the signal lines for outputting the signal to the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d. and the output integration board 72, it becomes necessary to remove the electrical connections between the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 and the control device for maintenance. In this case, work locations are consolidated on the output integration board 72, and workability can be improved.

Signal lines for outputting signals to the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are integrated into one harness. The connector member is connected to the harness connector 78 of the output integrated board 72 . In this case, by removing the harness from the harness connector 78, the electrical connections between the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c and 46d, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 and the control device side can be released collectively. From this point as well, it is possible to improve the workability during maintenance and the like.

An electrical path for outputting a signal from the light emitting circuit 87 to the display light emitting section 53 and an electrical path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker section 54 are formed on the distribution control board 71. Although it is configured to be connected to the harness connector 78 through the electric circuit formed on the circuit and output integration board 72, the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 is not interposed in these electric paths. As a result, in a configuration in which the distribution control device 70 is interposed in an electric path for outputting signals to the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, the light emitting circuit 87 and the sound output circuit are connected to the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It is possible to prevent the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 from intervening in the processing for outputting the signal from 88 . An electric path for outputting a signal from the light emitting circuit 87 to the display light emitting section 53 and an electric path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker section 54 are formed on the distribution control board 71. A configuration that does not include such an electric circuit is also possible.

As described above, the distribution control device 70 is provided with not only the distribution control board 71 but also the output integration board 72, and these distribution control board 71 and the output integration board 72 are connected to the distribution side connector 76a and the output integration side connector. 76b are used to detachably connect electrically. The output integrated board 72 is provided with a motor drive circuit 77 and a harness connector 78 . As a result, when there is a need to change the presence or absence of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d and the increase/decrease in the number between models, the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 is required to be different between models, it is only necessary to change the configuration of the output integration board 72 between models, and the configuration of the distribution control board 71 and the production control device 80 (excluding the configuration of programs and data) can be used as they are between the models.

Here, processing executed by the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 will be described. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63 and RAM 64 of the main controller 60 will be referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63 and main RAM 64, and the MPU 73, ROM 74 and RAM 75 of the distribution control board 71 will be referred to as the distribution side. It is called MPU73, distribution side ROM74, and distribution side RAM75.

FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed in the distribution side MPU 73 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec).

First, in step S301, a table setting process for setting a control table used for executing drive control of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d and control of the effect control device 80 is executed. In the table setting process, for example, a control pattern table for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the main MPU 62 is set. In the following step S302, the content of the display control of each of the display devices 41, 43, 44, the content of the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53, and the content of the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are transmitted to the performance controller provided in the performance control device 80. A command selection process for instructing the CPU 82 is executed. In the command selection process, a command is output to the effect CPU 82 according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301.

After that, in step S303, a movable object control process for controlling the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d is executed. In the movable object control process, the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d are controlled according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed in step S304. In the pointer update process, the current pointer information in the control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting processing>
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

If the variation command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 62 (step S401: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, the results of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 62 at the start of the current game cycle are specified, and the specification is made. The information obtained is written in the RAM 64 .

After that, on the condition that the variable display time corresponding to the variable command received this time from the main MPU 62 is the variable display time corresponding to the possible occurrence of the preliminary announcement effect (step S403: YES), the preliminary announcement lottery process is executed. (Step S404). In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to perform the advance notice effect on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 in the current game round. As already explained, such an advance notice effect is performed in a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the main display device 41 starts variably displaying the symbols, or in some cases. In a situation where patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of pattern rows in the pattern rows, characters are displayed on one of the display devices 41, 43 and 44 separately from the patterns on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. Also included are those in which the background screen is in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and in which the patterns on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are in a predetermined mode different from the previous modes. The advance notice effect can occur in any game round when the ready-to-win effect is performed and when the ready-to-win effect is not performed, but it is higher when the ready-to-win effect is performed than when the ready-to-win effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, the notice effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the result of losing, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot results have a lower appearance rate. is set to occur more easily.

In the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice lottery table pre-stored in the distribution side ROM 74 is read out to the distribution side RAM 75 . The advance notice lottery table is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Then, a value is acquired from the advance notice lottery counter provided so as to be periodically updated in the distribution side RAM 75, and information on the advance notice lottery result corresponding to the acquired value is obtained from the advance notice lottery table read this time. Identify.

When a negative determination is made in step S403, or when the process of step S404 is executed, the variable display time corresponding to the variable command received this time from the main side MPU 62 is the variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect. (step S405: YES), the ready-to-win effect lottery process is executed (step S406). That is, when the variable display time of the game round determined by the main MPU 62 corresponds to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect, the type of the ready-to-win effect to be executed is determined in the ready-to-win effect lottery process, and the main MPU 62 When the variable display time of the game round determined by does not correspond to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win effect lottery process is not executed.

As already described, the ready-to-win effect corresponds to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41. A display state is included in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols with a possibility of establishing a combination of jackpot symbols is displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the state where the ready-to-win pattern combination is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background image or the sub-display devices 43 and 44. After performing a reach effect by reducing or hiding a combination of reach patterns, substantially the entire display surface of the main display device 41 and substantially the entire display surface of each sub display device 43, 44 Predetermined It includes those that perform reach effects by displaying characters such as characters as animations. The ready-to-win effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than the game times corresponding to the result of losing, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot results have a low reach effect. It's set up to make it easier.

In the ready-to-win effect lottery process, a ready-to-win lottery table pre-stored in the distribution side ROM 74 is read out to the distribution side RAM 75 . The ready-to-win lottery table is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with combinations of variation commands and type commands. Then, a value is obtained from a ready-to-win lottery counter provided so as to be periodically updated in the distribution side RAM 75, and information on the ready-to-win effect lottery result corresponding to the acquired value is read this time from a ready-to-win lottery table. Identify from

When a negative determination is made in step S405, or when the processing of step S406 is executed, stop symbol determination processing is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is either the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result, it corresponds to the stop result that the same pattern combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variable jackpot result. The effective lines L1 to L5 on which the same combination of symbols are stop-displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbol is not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and the activated line L1 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a specific combination of symbols (“3, 4, 1”) is established on L5 is determined as the current stop result information. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a result of losing, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect is specified from the content of the combination of the variation command and the type command. Then, when the ready-to-win effect occurs, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above specific symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and on one or two effective lines L1 to L5 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols is established is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect does not occur, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols does not materialize on all of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the reach on all of the activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is not established is determined as the information of the current stop result.

After that, a control pattern table setting process is executed (step S408). In the control pattern table setting process, the result of the advance notice lottery process (step S404), whether or not the ready-to-win effect occurs, the result of the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S406) when the ready-to-win effect occurs, and the stop symbol determination process ( The control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the results of step S407) is read from the distribution side ROM 74 and stored in the distribution side RAM 75. FIG.

After that, determination processing of the variable display time is executed (step S409). In this process, information on the variable display time of the current game cycle is specified from the content of the variable command currently received from the main side MPU 62 , and the information on the specified variable display time is stored in the distribution side RAM 75 . variable time counter. The variable time counter is a counter for the distribution side MPU 73 to specify the timing of ending the variable display of the symbols on the main display device 41 and starting the fixed display of the symbols in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in the distribution MPU 73, that is, each time 4 msec elapses.

In the situation where the performance execution control is performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), the value of the variable time counter of the distribution side RAM 75 set in step S409 If it is "0" (step S411: YES), information of the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the fixed time counter provided in the distribution side RAM 75 (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in the distribution side MPU 73, that is, each time 4 msec elapses. After that, a fixed display start command is transmitted to the effect CPU 82 (step S413). As a result, in the effect CPU 82, each pattern that is standby-displayed on the main display device 41 is confirmed and displayed as it is, and the confirmed display state is maintained for the confirmation display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). The display of the main display device 41 is controlled so as to be maintained.

In the table setting process, other processes are executed in step S414 in addition to the above processes. In other processing, for example, when an opening command is received from the main MPU 62, a control pattern table for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is read, and when an ending command is received from the main MPU 62, executes processing for ending the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, in a situation where neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the control pattern table for executing the demonstration display effect is read.

<Production control device 80>
Next, the effect control device 80 will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the effect control device 80. As shown in FIG.

The production control device 80 is provided with a production CPU 82, a memory module 83, a work memory 84, a production LSI 85, a VRAM 86, and the light emission circuit 87 and sound output circuit 88 already described. A substrate 81 is provided.

The performance CPU 82 has a function as a main control unit in the performance control device 80, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the effect CPU 82 is electrically connected to the distribution side MPU 73 , and various commands transmitted from the distribution side MPU 73 are input to the effect CPU 82 . The production CPU 82 is electrically connected to the memory module 83 and the work memory 84 via an external bus 89, and based on commands received from the distribution side MPU 73, programs and various data stored in the memory module 83 are displayed. is transferred to the work memory 84. In addition, the performance CPU 82 is electrically connected to the performance LSI 85 via the external bus 89, and outputs image signals to the respective display devices 41, 43, 44 based on commands received from the distribution side MPU 73. a drawing instruction to cause the light emission circuit 87 to output drive data for light emission; and a sound output instruction to cause the sound output circuit 88 to output drive data for sound output. Note that the main display device 41 displays a two-dimensional image (2D image) or a three-dimensional image (3D image), and also displays an image obtained by integrating the two-dimensional image and the three-dimensional image. Also, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 do not display a three-dimensional image, but display only a two-dimensional image.

The work memory 84 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read from the memory module 83 and transferred, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work memory 84 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires power supply from the outside for storing data, and more specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The work memory 84 requires a faster data reading speed than the memory module 83 . Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the work memory 84 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the work memory 84 based on a data transfer instruction from the performance CPU 82 to the memory module 83 . Specifically, all control data such as programs and data used by the performance CPU 82 are read to the work memory 84 when the supply of operating power to the performance CPU 82 is started. Then, the performance CPU 82 reads the control data transferred to the work memory 84 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The memory module 83 pre-stores control data including control programs and fixed value data, and pre-stores various image data for displaying images on the display devices 41 , 43 , and 44 . The memory module 83 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require power supply from the outside to retain data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the memory module 83 is used as a non-write-only read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 83 include image data for 2D images such as sprite data such as patterns and characters displayed on the respective display devices 41, 43 and 44, background data, and moving image data. include. The various image data stored in the memory module 83 include object data such as characters to be displayed on the main display device 41, and image data for 3D images such as texture data pasted on the object data. is

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. there is The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which the still image data is compressed. Moving image data will be described later in detail.

Object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices of three-dimensional coordinates. For example, since a surface model is applied to the object data, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates set in advance for each object data as the origin. That is, each object data three-dimensionally defines the relative position (that is, orientation and size) of each polygon in a self-contained local coordinate system.

Texture data is image data that is pasted onto each polygon of object data. By pasting texture data onto object data, an image corresponding to the object data, such as a display image that includes patterns and characters, for example, is generated. be. Texture data may be stored in any manner, but may include at least a combination of bitmap format data and color palette data referenced when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image.

The memory module 83 stores, in addition to the control data and various image data used by the performance CPU 82 , light emission data for causing the display light emission section 53 to emit light according to a predetermined pattern, and predetermined data from the speaker section 54 . Sound output data for sound output is stored in advance. The light emission data is data obtained by compressing luminance data corresponding to a time-series lighting pattern by a predetermined compression technique. A decoding process is performed on the light emission data, and the data expanded by the decoding process is used. The sound output data is data obtained by compressing sound data corresponding to a time-series sound output pattern by a predetermined compression technique. A decoding process is performed on the output sound output data, and the data expanded by the decoding process is used.

The VRAM 86 outputs various data necessary for causing the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, various data necessary for outputting sound from the speaker unit 54, and image output to each display device 41, 43, 44. It is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for The VRAM 86 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The VRAM 86 requires a faster data reading speed than the memory module 83 . Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the VRAM 86 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The performance LSI 85 has a function of drawing on each display device 41, 43, 44 using the image data read out to the VRAM 86 based on the drawing instruction from the performance CPU 82, and based on the light emission instruction from the performance CPU 82. , the function of controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 using the data read into the effect LSI 85 and expanded by decoding processing, and the sound output instruction from the effect CPU 82. It has a function of controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 54 using the data that is output and expanded by decoding processing.

Specifically, the rendering LSI 85 includes an I/F 91, a transfer controller 92, a register 93, a preliminary transfer control section 94, a video decoder 95, a 2D control section 96, a 3D control section 97, a first display It includes a circuit 98 , a second display circuit 99 , a decoder for light emission 101 , a light emission control section 102 , a decoder for sound 103 and a sound output control section 104 . These circuits 91 to 104 are interconnected via an internal bus 105, which in turn is connected to an external bus 89 via an I/F 91. FIG.

The transfer controller 92 transfers data based on transfer instructions from the preliminary transfer control unit 94 , 2D control unit 96 , 3D control unit 97 , light emission control unit 102 and sound output control unit 104 . Specifically, data transfer from the memory module 83 to the register 93 of the production LSI 85 and data transfer from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 are executed. Also, data is read from the VRAM 86 . Note that the register 93 requires a faster data reading speed than the memory module 83 .

Based on the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 and stored in the register 93, the preliminary transfer control unit 94 is image data necessary when drawing data for one frame is created in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. However, it instructs the transfer controller 92 to transfer so that it is read out to the VRAM 86 by the timing of executing the drawing process. As a result, the image data necessary for executing drawing in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 are read out to the VRAM 86 in advance.

The video decoder 95 decodes the video data transferred to the VRAM 86 . Although the details will be described later, a plurality of pieces of decoded image data (2D still image data) are created by executing decoding processing on the moving image data, and the plurality of pieces of decoded image data are developed in the register 93. . The decoded image data developed in the register 93 is used when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute drawing processing.

The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute processing by a control program according to the drawing list transmitted from the performance CPU 82 and stored in the register 93 . It should be noted that all of the control programs for the operation of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may be provided by a drawing list, and a memory in which the control programs are stored in advance is incorporated in the production LSI 85, and the control program The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may execute predetermined processing according to the contents of the drawing list and the contents of the drawing list. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 83 in advance.

When drawing processing is executed in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 , drawing data for one frame is created in the VRAM 86 using (or by processing) the image data read out to the VRAM 86 . Drawing data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the images on the display surfaces of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 are updated at a predetermined update timing. That's what I mean. Although details will be described later, the VRAM 86 is provided with two frame areas for each of the main display device 41 and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 as areas for creating drawing data for one frame. Each frame area is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame in the corresponding display device 41 , 43 , 44 . Specifically, each frame region includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system, and for example, in a configuration in which each dot can display only 256 colors, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area is 1 byte.

Incidentally, the 3D control section 97 has a geometry calculation section and a rendering section. Based on the drawing list stored in the register 93, the geometry calculation unit arranges the object data designated as the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system. In addition, the geometry calculation unit executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface. Based on the drawing list stored in the register 93, the rendering unit creates two-dimensional data by projecting each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane and pastes the texture data to render the two-dimensional data. Create drawing data for one frame.

Since two frame areas are provided for each of the main display device 41 and the sub-display devices 43 and 44, drawing data created in one frame region of the main display device 41, for example, can be used to display the corresponding image. While drawing is being performed on the main display device 41, drawing data that will be used in the other frame area on the main display device 41 is created. In other words, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame area.

The first display circuit 98 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the main display device 41 based on drawing data created in one frame region to be output among two frame regions corresponding to the main display device 41. and outputs the image signal to the main display device 41 . Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame area to be output to the first display circuit 98 . The transferred drawing data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the main display device 41 and converted into gradation data. An image signal corresponding to each dot of the main display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data.

The second display circuit 99 displays each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 on the basis of the drawing data created in one of the two frame regions corresponding to each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 to be output. An image signal corresponding to dots is generated, and the image signal is output to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 . Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the output target frame area to the second display circuit 99 . The transferred image data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and converted into gradation data. An image signal corresponding to each dot of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is generated and output based on the gradation data.

Based on the light emission instruction from the performance CPU 82, the light emission decoder 101 stores the light emission data necessary for executing light emission control at a predetermined timing in the light emission control unit 102 until the timing for executing the light emission control comes. Then, a transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 so that the VRAM 86 is read out. Further, the light emission decoder 101 reads out the light emission data previously transferred to the VRAM 86 and executes decoding processing on the light emission data to create developed luminance data. is stored in the register 93. As a result, the luminance data after expansion of the light emission data is stored in the register 93 before the predetermined timing.

The light emission control unit 102 outputs the luminance data developed in the register 93 to the light emission circuit 87 based on the light emission instruction from the effect CPU 82 . As a result, a signal according to the luminance data is output from the light emitting circuit 87, and the display light emitting section 53 is brought into a light emitting state according to the luminance data.

In the sound decoder 103, based on the sound output instruction from the performance CPU 82, the sound output control unit 104 executes the sound output control with the sound output data necessary for executing the sound output control at a predetermined timing. A transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 so that the VRAM 86 has been read by the timing. Further, the sound decoder 103 reads out the sound output data transferred in advance to the VRAM 86 and decodes the sound output data to create expanded sound data. is stored in the register 93. As a result, the sound data after expansion of the sound output data is stored in the register 93 before the predetermined timing.

The sound output control unit 104 outputs the sound data developed in the register 93 to the sound output circuit 88 based on the sound output instruction from the performance CPU 82 . As a result, a signal according to the sound data is output from the sound output circuit 88, and sound is output from the speaker unit 54 in a manner according to the sound data.

<Processing configuration of CPU 82 for production>
Next, processing executed by the performance CPU 82 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically at a cycle of 20 msec, by the performance CPU 82 .

When the first display circuit 98 outputs an image signal for one frame to the main display device 41, it starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the display surface, and then displays the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output to dots arranged on a line, and image signals are sequentially output to dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output for the dot in the lower right corner of the display surface. When the second display circuit 99 outputs image signals for one frame to the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the second display circuit 99 starts outputting image signals from the dot in the upper left corner of each display surface, and then outputs the dot at one end. image signals are sequentially output to the dots arranged on the horizontal lines included in the horizontal lines, and the image signals are sequentially output to the dots from the left to the right for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output for the dot in the lower right corner of the display surface. In this case, the production LSI 85 outputs a V interrupt signal to the production CPU 82 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot for all of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to update the image of one frame. is made to recognize that the performance CPU 82 has been completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of the image for one frame. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal has not been received, if 20 msec has passed since the previous V interrupt process was started, a new V interrupt process is started.

In the V interrupt process, command analysis processing is first executed (step S501). Specifically, the contents of commands stored in a command buffer provided in the work memory 84 are analyzed. Here, when the effect CPU 82 receives the strobe signal from the distribution side MPU 73, whatever the process being executed at that time is, the command interrupt process is executed. In command interrupt processing, the command received from the distribution side MPU 73 is transferred to the command buffer of the work memory 84 .

After that, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S502: YES), the command correspondence process is executed (step S503). In the command correspondence processing, an execution object table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 83 . The execution target tables include a table for executing display control of each display device 41, 43, 44, a table for executing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53, and a table for executing sound output control of the speaker unit 54. There exists a table for In the execution object table for display control, when displaying a moving image corresponding to the received command on the display surfaces of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, one frame of image is displayed at each update timing of the image. The contents of the necessary processing are defined. In the execution target table for light emission control, when causing the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light according to the light emission pattern corresponding to the received command, the details of the processing necessary for causing light emission at each light emission control timing are defined. ing. In the execution target table for sound output control, when the speaker unit 54 is caused to output sound according to the sound output pattern corresponding to the received command, information necessary for outputting sound at each sound output control timing is stored. The content of processing is defined.

The commands received by the production CPU 82 from the distribution side MPU 73 include a command at the start of fluctuation, a command at the start of notice production, a command at the start of normal reach, a command at the start of super reach, a command to start confirmation display, a command to start notification, and There is a notification release command and the like. When these commands are received, an execution target table necessary for executing effects or notifications corresponding to each of these commands on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 is read.

If a negative determination is made in step S502 or if the processing of step S503 is executed, task processing for light emission control (step S504), task processing for sound output control (step S505), and task processing for display control (step S506) is executed.

In task processing for light emission control, by referring to the control data for the current processing time in the execution target table set as the use target for light emission control, an effect is generated to realize the light emission mode corresponding to the instruction timing of this time. Various data necessary for instructing the LSI 85 to emit light are set. Specifically, the various data include address information of the area in which the light emission data is stored in the memory module 83 and the address information of the area in which the light emission data is stored in the register 93 when it is the timing to instruct the execution of the decoding process of the light emission data. There are address information of the area to which the light emission data is transferred, information for instructing the light emission decoder 101 to decode the light emission data, and the like. Further, when it is the timing to instruct the change of the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 53, the above various data includes an area for storing the data to be used among the light emitting data developed in the register 93. address information, etc. exist.

In the task processing for sound output control, by referring to the control data of the current processing in the execution target table set as the use target of sound output control, the sound output mode corresponding to the current instruction timing is realized. Therefore, various data necessary for instructing the performance LSI 85 to output sound are set. More specifically, the various data include address information of an area in which the sound output data is stored in the memory module 83 when it is time to instruct the execution of the decoding process of the sound output data, register 93 address information of the area to which the sound output data is transferred, information for instructing the sound decoder 103 to decode the sound output data, and the like. Further, when it is the timing to instruct the change of the sound output mode of the speaker unit 54, the data to be used among the sound output data developed in the register 93 is stored in the various data. Area address information and the like exist.

In the task processing for display control, by referring to the control data for the current processing in the execution target table set as the use target for display control, an image for one frame corresponding to the current instruction timing is displayed. For this purpose, various data necessary for giving drawing instructions to the rendering LSI 85 are set. Specifically, the various data include address information of the area in which the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 83, information of the target frame area for which drawing data is to be created using the image data to be controlled, and control data. There are coordinate information for writing the target image data, scale information for writing the image data, uniform α value (semitransparent value) information for writing the image data, and the like.

Thereafter, list output processing is executed (step S507). In the list output process, a light emission list for setting the light emission mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time, a sound output list for setting the sound output mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time, and a sound output list for setting the sound output mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time Each drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the instruction timing of . In this case, in the light emission list, the data for light emission grasped in the previous task processing for light emission control is set as the object to be used. The light emission decoder 101 of the effect LSI 85 decodes the light emission data according to the light emission list, and the light emission control section 102 of the effect LSI 85 outputs the light emission data to the light emission circuit 87 according to the light emission list. Further, in the sound output list, data for sound output grasped in the previous task processing for sound output control is set as a use target. The sound decoder 103 of the performance LSI 85 decodes the sound output data according to the sound output list. Output data. In addition, in the drawing list, the image data grasped by the previous task processing for display control becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the rendering LSI 85 create drawing data in the frame area of the VRAM 86 according to this drawing list. Processing in the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 will be described in detail later.

The task processing for display control in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S601). In the setting process for control start, based on the currently set execution target table for display control, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the effect CPU 82 in this processing cycle. to run. An individual image is a 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for design and image data for back, or defined by a combination of image data for objects and image data for textures. A single 3D image that

Specifically, regarding the control start setting processing, first, based on the currently set execution target table for display control, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in this processing cycle. do. If it exists, the work memory 84 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and the individual image grasped as the control start target is searched one-to-one. Allocate a free buffer area to support it. Furthermore, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control corresponding to the individual image is set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S602). This control update target is an individual image for which setting processing for starting control has been completed and which may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

After that, a background calculation process is executed (step S603). In the background calculation process, the backmost image that constitutes the background image, and the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, and uniform α value on the virtual two-dimensional plane if the background character is a 2D image. and various parameter information required to create a drawing list, such as α data designation, are calculated and derived. On the other hand, in the background arithmetic processing, the backmost image that constitutes the background image, and the 3D image of the background character, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, and brightness in the world coordinate system are calculated. Light information for adding , camera information for projection, and various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list, such as Z-test designation, are calculated and derived.

After that, a production calculation process is executed (step S604). In the effect calculation processing, processing for calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as ready-to-win effect, advance notice effect, and big win effect. In addition, processing for calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for individual images to be displayed when performing various notifications.

After that, a symbol calculation process is executed (step S605). In the symbol arithmetic processing, among the symbols to be changed and displayed in each game round, the current control update target is grasped. Also, the above various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target.

Incidentally, in each process of steps S603 to S605, a process of updating the parameters for starting control set in step S601 is executed. Also, in each process of steps S603 to S605, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image is updated is used. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is pre-stored in the memory module 83 and pre-transferred to the work memory 84 by the timing at which the performance CPU 82 needs to read it.

After that, a drawing instruction target grasping process is executed (step S606). In the processing for grasping the drawing instruction target, among the individual images that have become control update targets by the respective arithmetic processing in steps S603, S604, and S605, the one-frame image corresponding to the current drawing data creation instruction is selected. Executes a process to understand the contained individual images. The grasping is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to the information of the coordinates, rotation angles and scales of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all individual images for which control has been started, but only the individual images to be displayed. There is no need to select the individual images, and even if the individual images are not selected, there is no need to uselessly draw the individual images that are not to be displayed. As a result, the processing loads on the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 are reduced. However, it is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the effect CPU 82 and the individual image to be controlled by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may be the same. In this case, there is no need to execute the process of step S606.

The content of displaying a 2D image and a 3D image using a drawing list created based on the results of task processing for display control will be described.

When an image is displayed on the main display device 41, the background image is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed on the back side, and when a predetermined display effect occurs, the background image is displayed in front of the background image. A performance image such as a character for a game is displayed, and in the case of a performance for a game round, a pattern image is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed on the front side of the background image and the performance image. . In this case, the background image and effect image are displayed as 3D images based on execution of drawing processing by the 3D control unit 97, and the pattern images are displayed as 2D images based on execution of drawing processing by the 2D control unit 96. Therefore, as a drawing list for displaying an image on the main display device 41, a drawing instruction is given according to a 3D drawing list for displaying a 3D image for the background image and the effect image, and a 2D image for the pattern image. A drawing instruction is given using a 2D drawing list for display. As the image display on the main display device 41, the background image and effect image are displayed as 3D images to enable realistic image display, while the pattern images are displayed as 2D images to reduce the processing load. becomes possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a 3D image may be displayed for the background image, and a 2D image may be displayed for the effect image and the pattern image, and a 3D image may be displayed for the background image and the pattern image. A 2D image may be displayed for the effect image, or a 2D image may be displayed for the background image and the effect image, and a 3D image may be displayed for the pattern image.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the register 93 used when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute drawing processing. As shown in FIG. 16, the register 93 is provided with a drawing area 111 for main display as an area used for displaying an image on the main display device 41 . The drawing area 111 for main display includes a 2D drawing area 112 in which drawing data for displaying a pattern image as a 2D image on the main display device 41 is created, and a background image and effect image as a 3D image on the main display device 41. A 3D drawing area 113 is provided in which drawing data for displaying is created. A main first frame area 114 and a main second frame area 115 are provided in the drawing area 111 for main display. In each of the first frame area 114 for main and the second frame area 115 for main, the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 113 are combined to display the main display device. Drawing data for one frame to be displayed on 41 is created. In this case, in a situation where drawing data created in one frame region of the first main frame region 114 and the second main frame region 115 is used to perform drawing on the main display device 41, Rendering data for future use is created for the frame region.

On the other hand, when an image is displayed on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, the background image is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed on the back side, and a predetermined display effect is produced. When this occurs, an effect image such as a character for effect is displayed in front of the background image. In this case, the background image and effect image are displayed as 2D images. In other words, the 2D image is displayed on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, but the 3D image is not displayed. Therefore, with respect to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, drawing instructions are not given using the 3D drawing list, but drawing instructions are given using the 2D drawing list. In the image display on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, only the 2D image is used without using the 3D image, so that not only the main display device 41 but also the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided. In the configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying images on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 .

As shown in FIG. 16, the register 93 is provided with a drawing area 116 for sub-display as an area used for displaying images on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 . A sub first frame region 117 and a sub second frame region 118 are provided in the sub display drawing region 116 . In each of the sub first frame region 117 and the sub second frame region 118, the 2D control unit 96 creates drawing data for displaying the background image and effect image as 2D images on the respective sub display devices 43 and 44. be done. Although the details will be described later, each of the sub-first frame region 117 and the sub-second frame region 118 contains drawing data for displaying an image of one frame on the first sub-display device 43 and a second frame region. Drawing data for the sum of drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the sub-display device 44 is created. In this case, rendering on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is performed using the rendering data created in one of the sub-first frame region 117 and the sub-second frame region 118. In the context of execution, future drawing data is created for the other frame region.

As described above, both the 2D image and the 3D image can be simultaneously displayed as one frame image on the main display device 41, and the 2D image is displayed as one frame image on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. , each time an image update timing for one frame is reached, an image for one frame is updated in each of the main display device 41 and each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, and an image for each one frame at the image update timing is updated. A combination of at least one 2D drawing list and at least one 3D drawing list is provided from the production CPU 82 to the production LSI 85 for updating. That is, when the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96 for at least one 2D drawing list and the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97 for at least one 3D drawing list are completed, each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 The creation of drawing data for one frame of image is completed in .

Next, a 2D drawing list for displaying a 2D image will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 17(a) to 17(c).

Header information is set in the 2D drawing list. Target buffer information indicating in which frame areas 114, 115, 117, and 118 the drawing data for displaying the image corresponding to the 2D drawing list is to be drawn is set in the header information. there is Specifically, information indicating in which of the main first frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115 drawing data for displaying an image on the main display device 41 is set. , information indicating in which of the sub first frame region 117 and the sub second frame region 118 drawing data for displaying an image on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is to be drawn. Various designation information is set in the header information.

In addition to the header information, the 2D drawing list contains frame areas 114, 115, 117, and 118 of each image data as information corresponding to a plurality of types of image data used to display an image of one frame. Information of display order priority data indicating the drawing order to the image data, parameter information of each image data, and address information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored are set. More specifically, the information of the display order priority data is set so as to be serial numbered numerical information, and the combination of parameter information and address information is set so as to correspond to each numerical information on a one-to-one basis. .

The display order priority data is set so that an individual image desired to be displayed so as to be located on the far side of the display surface in one frame image is drawn first. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the 2D rendering list of FIG. 17A, the background data is set as the first rendering target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written to the frame area to be drawn, then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and then the sprite data B is written.

A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P(0), P(1), P(2), . Specifically, the background data parameter P(0) indicates the position on the virtual two-dimensional plane (frame areas 114, 115, 117, 118) when writing the background data, as shown in FIG. Coordinate information, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when background data is written, and magnification for writing in the frame area for the size set as the initial state of the background data. information of the scale to be displayed, information of uniform α value indicating the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when writing background data, and information of α data specification indicating whether or not to apply α data and the application target are set. there is The types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A as shown in FIG. 17(c).

Coordinate information is not individually set for all pixels forming image data, but one coordinate information is set for one piece of image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. The 2D control unit 96 is capable of recognizing that the specified coordinate information is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when arranging the image data, the center pixel is on the specified coordinates make it As a result, it is possible to reduce the information volume (that is, the data volume) of the coordinate information to be specified for one image data in the performance CPU 82 . In addition, since it is not necessary for the rendering LSI 85 to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the center pixel, and may be, for example, a corner pixel such as an upper left or upper right pixel. Since sprite data and still image data are basically defined as rectangular, by using corner pixels as reference pixels, the effect LSI 85 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

The uniform α value is transparency information that is applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information that is derived as a calculation result in the effect CPU 82 . The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is pre-stored in the memory module 83 as image data. The α data can vary the transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting the uniform α value.

The address information A(0), A(1), A(2), . Here, when each image data is used in the production LSI 85, the image data is not directly read out from the memory module 83 and used, but is stored in the VRAM 86 from the memory module 83 before the timing of starting use of the image data. The image data is read out to the pre-transfer area 86a (see FIG. 13), and the image data is read out from the pre-transfer area 86a and used. In this case, in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, except for the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data, the address information stored in the memory module 83 is Information of an address ID corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored is set. When the preliminary transfer control section 94 of the performance LSI 85 transfers the image data from the area of the address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the information of the address ID to the preliminary transfer area 86a, the image data is transferred to the preliminary transfer area 86a. Information corresponding to the address of the area where the image data was transferred overwrites the address information corresponding to the image data to be read this time in the 2D drawing list.

On the other hand, the decoded image data does not need to be read out from the memory module 83 because it is written in the moving image expansion area 119 (see FIG. 16) provided in the register 93 . Therefore, when the decoded image data is set in the 2D drawing list, the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is the area where the decoded image data to be used this time is stored in the moving image expansion area 119. address is set. Since the decoded image data is treated as not to be transferred to the preliminary transfer area 86a by the preliminary transfer control unit 94, the preliminary transfer control unit 94 does not rewrite the address information corresponding to the decoded image data in the drawing list. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is initially blank. may be configured to set information for specifying the address of the area in which is stored.

The 2D drawing list in which the address information has been rewritten becomes a target for execution of drawing processing in the 2D control unit 96. During the drawing processing, the 2D control unit 96 receives the information set as the address information in the 2D drawing list. Image data is read out from the pre-transfer area 86a corresponding to , or the expansion area 119 for moving images. Incidentally, moving image data can be set as image data to be used in the 2D rendering list. A decoding process is performed by the moving image decoder 95 of the effect LSI 85 on the moving image data read out to the pre-transfer area 86a. Then, a plurality of pieces of decoded image data obtained by the decoding process are stored in the moving image development area 119 as already described. However, the moving image data itself is excluded from execution targets of rendering processing by the 2D control unit 96 .

In this way, in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, address ID information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as address information. On the other hand, address information for specifying the transfer destination area of the image data from the memory module 83 is not set. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 . In addition, since the effect CPU 82 does not need to set the address information for specifying the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data is to be transferred in the 2D drawing list, the effect CPU 82 does not need to set the 2D drawing list. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 82 .

Further, when the transfer of the image data from the memory module 83 to the advance transfer area 86a in the advance transfer control unit 94 of the rendering LSI 85 is completed, the address information of the 2D drawing list is stored in the memory module 83 as the image data to be transferred. is stored, is rewritten to information corresponding to the address of the area to which the image data to be transferred is transferred in the pre-transfer area 86a. As a result, even if the information corresponding to the address of the area of the advance transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred is not initially set in the 2D drawing list, the 2D control unit 96 can perform the drawing process in advance. Information corresponding to the address of the area of the transfer area 86a is set in the 2D drawing list.

Next, a 3D drawing list for displaying a 3D image will be described with reference to FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b).

Header information is set in the 3D drawing list as in the 2D drawing list. The contents of the header information are the same as in the case of the 2D drawing list. In the 3D drawing list, in addition to the above header information, information corresponding to multiple types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system when creating the drawing data this time is also stored in the world coordinate system for each image data. Information of display order priority data indicating the arrangement order, parameter information of each image data, and address information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored are set. More specifically, the information of the display order priority data is set so as to be serial numbered numerical information, and the combination of parameter information and address information is set so as to correspond to each numerical information on a one-to-one basis. .

In the 3D drawing list shown in FIG. 18A, the background image data is set as the first drawing object, and the background object A is set as the second, the background object B as the third, and so on. It is In addition, the image data for effect is set after the image data for background, for example, object A for effect is set as m-th object, object B for effect is m+1-th, and so on. there is

A plurality of types of parameter information are set in the parameter information P'(0), P'(1), P'(2), . . . , P'(m), P'(m+1), . ing. Specifically, regarding the parameter information P′(0) of the image data for the back surface, as shown in FIG. (X value information, Y value information, Z value information), rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle in the world coordinate system when back image data is set, and the initial value of back image data For the scale set as the state, uniform α indicating the scale information indicating the magnification when setting to the world coordinate system and the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when setting the image data for the back Value information and are set.

Here, coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the object data. Also, this coordinate information is set for the object data, but is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, coordinate values of each pixel are predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 83 in a state attached to a combination of object data and texture data. These UV coordinate values are referred to by the 3D control unit 97 of the rendering LSI 85 when texture mapping is performed.

The parameter information P′(0) includes camera information including information on the coordinates and direction of the virtual camera when projecting the image data for the back onto a virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and the image data for the back. and light information, including position and orientation information for virtual light sources that determine shadows when rendering.

The parameter information P'(0) contains Z-test designation information indicating whether or not the Z-buffer method, which is a type of method for removing hidden surfaces, is applied. In the Z-buffer method, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) lined up on the Z-axis when many objects and two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame region.

Besides the Z-buffer method, the Z-sort method is also used as a method for removing hidden surfaces. The Z-sorting method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set in each pixel arranged on the Z-axis is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the frame area. When applying the Z sorting method, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, addition processing and fusion processing for the numerical information are executed. Although a detailed description of the processing configuration of hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, it is activated when an effect image is to be displayed.

The parameter information P′(0) includes α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and to whom it is applied, and fog designation information indicating whether or not fog is applied and to which fog is applied. Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As methods for setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transparency information that is applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information that is derived as a calculation result in the effect CPU 82 . The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data or texture data, and is stored in the memory module 83 in advance as image data. The α data can vary the transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting the uniform α value.

Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically in the Z-axis direction, in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to express fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the image for one frame is fogged in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object located on the far side in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and the texture will not be obtained, so another fog is set for the object. configuration. As a result, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while not impairing the texture.

The address information A′(0), A′(1), A′(2), . is set. In this case, in the 3D rendering list output from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85, as the address information, address ID information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set. and the address of the area to which the image data is transferred in the preliminary transfer area 86a when the preliminary transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85 completes the transfer of the image data to the preliminary transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. In addition, when the decoded image data is set in the 3D drawing list, the address information contains the address of the area in the moving image development area 119 where the decoded image data is stored. is set from the beginning, and rewriting processing for the address information by the advance transfer control unit 94 is not executed, as in the 2D drawing list. However, in a 3D image, object image data and texture image data are required to display one type of individual image, so object image data and texture image data are set as one drawing target. In addition, address information is set for each of the object image data and the texture image data.

Next, the 2D rendering process executed by the 2D control unit 96 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the 2D rendering process executed by the 2D control unit 96. As shown in FIG. The 2D control unit 96 uses programs and data pre-stored in the memory module 83 to execute 2D drawing processing. All of these programs and data are read out to registers provided inside the 2D control unit 96 when the supply of operating power to the performance LSI 85 is started. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 2D control unit 96 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83 .

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the 2D creation completion flag provided in the register 93 of the production LSI 85 is "0" and there is a 2D drawing list in the register 93 for which drawing processing has not been completed. (Step S701). The 2D creation completion flag is a state in which the drawing process for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, and the drawing created in the 2D drawing area 112 in the main display drawing area 111 by the drawing process. A flag for specifying in the 2D control unit 96 that the data is not drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create drawing data for one frame. . When the drawing process for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, the 2D creation completion flag is set to "1", and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 by the drawing process is one frame. When drawing is performed in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create drawing data, the 2D creation completion flag is cleared to "0". In addition, the case where there is an incomplete 2D drawing list means the case where there is a 2D drawing list for which drawing processing for all image data has not been completed, and the case where there is a 2D drawing list for which drawing processing has not yet been executed. This is the case when a draw list for

If the value of the 2D creation completion flag is "0" and there is an incomplete 2D drawing list, update processing of the drawing target is executed (step S702). In the drawing target update process, if a new 2D drawing list is to be executed for drawing processing this time, the image data set first in the display order priority data in the 2D drawing list is used for the current drawing. Select to execute the process. On the other hand, if one 2D drawing list is currently being created, the image data that is set to the display order priority data next to the display order priority data of the image data that was the target of the previous drawing process. is selected as the execution target of the current rendering process.

After that, the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data to be executed this time is transferred, or the moving image data to which the decoded image data to be executed this time is expanded. The address of the development area 119 is grasped from the address information in the 2D drawing list (step S703). In this case, if the address ascertained from the address information corresponds to the pre-transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the image data from that address in the pre-transfer area 86a. On the other hand, if the address ascertained from the address information corresponds to the expansion area 119 for moving picture, the image data is read from that address in the expansion area 119 for moving picture.

Also, the parameters to be applied to the image data to be executed for the current drawing process are grasped by executing calculations using the parameter information in the 2D drawing list (step S704). After that, a write process is executed to draw the image data to be executed for the current drawing process in the drawing target area with the parameters grasped in step S704 applied (step S705). In this writing process, if drawing data for displaying an image on the main display device 41 is to be created, the writing process is executed in the 2D drawing area 112 of the register 93 and the image is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44. In the case of creating the drawing data for the current drawing data, the writing process is executed to the frame region of the first sub frame region 117 and the second sub frame region 118 of the register 93 where the drawing data is to be created this time. .

After that, it is determined whether or not the processing of steps S702 to S705 has been completed for all the image data specified in one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to image display for one frame ( step S706). When the number of 2D drawing lists corresponding to image display for one frame is one, the image data in the last order among the plurality of types of image data for which drawing is instructed in the 2D drawing list. Creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data. In addition, when the number of 2D drawing lists corresponding to image display for one frame is two, a plurality of types of drawing instruction targets in the 2D drawing list on the rear side in the order of execution of drawing processing are specified. The creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data among the image data. In step S706, it is determined whether creation completion data is set in association with the current display order priority data. If creation completion data is set (step S706: YES), execution of the processing of steps S702 to S705 is completed for all image data specified in the 2D drawing list corresponding to image display for one frame. Since it means that the 2D creation completion flag of the register 93 is set to "1" (step S707).

Next, the 3D rendering process executed by the 3D control unit 97 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing 3D drawing processing executed by the 3D control unit 97. As shown in FIG. The 3D control unit 97 executes 3D drawing processing using programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83 . All of these programs and data are read out to a register provided inside the 3D control section 97 when the supply of operating power to the performance LSI 85 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 3D control unit 97 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83 .

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the 3D creation completion flag provided in the register 93 of the production LSI 85 is "0" and there is a 3D drawing list in the register 93 for which drawing processing has not been completed. (Step S801). The 3D creation completion flag is a state in which the drawing process for the 3D drawing list corresponding to image display for one frame is completed, and the drawing created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the main display drawing area 111 by the drawing process. This is a flag for the 3D control unit 97 to specify that the data is not drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create drawing data for one frame. . When the drawing process for the 3D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, the 3D creation completion flag is set to "1", and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 113 by the drawing process is one frame. 3D creation completion flag is cleared to "0" when drawing is performed in the first frame area 114 for main or the second frame area 115 for main in order to create the drawing data. Further, the case where there is an incomplete 3D drawing list means the case where there is a 3D drawing list for which the drawing processing for all image data has not been completed, and the case where there is a 3D drawing list for which the drawing processing has not yet been executed. This is the case when a draw list for

If the value of the 3D creation completion flag is "0" and there is an incomplete 3D drawing list, the processes of steps S802 to S810 are executed. In the processing of steps S802 to S810, first, it is determined whether creation completion data is set in association with the last display order priority data in one 3D drawing list. If so, only that one 3D drawing list is subjected to the processing of steps S802 to S810. On the other hand, if the creation completion data is not set, it is determined whether or not the creation completion data is set in association with the last display order priority data in the next 3D drawing list. is set, the two 3D drawing lists up to that point are collectively subjected to the processing of steps S802 to S810. As a result, even when a plurality of 3D drawing lists are set as a 3D drawing list for displaying an image for one frame, 3D drawing data can be created appropriately. .

In step S802, the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a or the moving image development area 119, in which the background image data designated as the object to be rendered in the 3D rendering list is stored, is obtained from the address information in the 3D rendering list. grasp (step S802). In this case, if the address ascertained from the address information corresponds to the pre-transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the image data from that address in the pre-transfer area 86a. On the other hand, if the address ascertained from the address information corresponds to the expansion area 119 for moving picture, the image data is read from that address in the expansion area 119 for moving picture. Thereafter, background setting processing is executed (step S803).

In the background setting process, it is determined whether or not the background image data whose address information has been grasped in step S802 has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, an empty buffer area to be referred to for arranging in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and when an empty buffer area is secured, the area is initialized. After that, world transformation that transforms the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the background image data into the coordinate values of the world coordinate system so that the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the parameter information in the 3D drawing list are obtained. Execute the process and set it in the buffer area secured above. If it is arranged, the parameters to be applied to the target background image data are grasped by executing calculations using the parameter information in the 3D rendering list, and the parameters are stored in the already secured buffer area. Executes update processing for various set parameters. Also, in the background setting process, a control end process is executed to erase the background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

After that, the addresses of the areas of the pre-transfer area 86a and the moving image development area 119, in which the image data for rendering specified as the object to be drawn in the 3D drawing list are stored, are grasped from the address information in the 3D drawing list. (Step S804). In this case, if the address ascertained from the address information corresponds to the pre-transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the image data from that address in the pre-transfer area 86a. On the other hand, if the address ascertained from the address information corresponds to the expansion area 119 for moving picture, the image data is read from that address in the expansion area 119 for moving picture. Thereafter, setting processing for effect is executed (step S805).

In the effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the effect image data whose address information has been grasped in step S804 has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If so, the various parameters are updated in the same manner as described in the background setting process. Also, in the effect setting process, a control end process is executed to erase image data for effect not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

By executing the processing of steps S802 to S805, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. , and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angles, and scales specified by the 3D drawing list. . FIG. 21 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

After that, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S806). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the 3D rendering list, and based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint, the world coordinate system is converted to the origin. to the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 21, a viewpoint PC11 indicated by a camera shape is set, and a corresponding coordinate system is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. . By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it becomes possible to switch the viewpoint individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 21 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

After that, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S807). In the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image closer to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image farther from the viewpoint is reduced.

After that, clipping processing is executed (step S808). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S807 is grasped with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. In this state, each individual image extracted in step S807 is based on the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 21) corresponding to the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponding to the main display device 41 to be rendered. to clip.

After that, lighting processing is executed (step S809). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the 3D rendering list, and shadows and reflections, etc. are added to each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. Calculate.

After that, each individual image that has been clipped in step S808 and has undergone lighting processing is projected onto the screen area PC12, which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection), and the data after the projection is projected. 3D drawing data is created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the register 93 by executing the color information setting process (step S810). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information for the projected data in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices. In such color information setting processing, basically, texture mapping processing is executed for pasting texture data corresponding to each projected data. Also, depending on the situation, processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, or if the process of step S810 is executed, the 3D creation completion flag of the register 93 is set to "1" (step S811). After that, by determining whether "1" is set to both the 2D creation completion flag and the 3D creation completion flag of the register 93, the 2D control unit for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame 96 and the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97 for the 3D drawing list corresponding to image display for one frame are completed (step S812). In other words, it is determined whether or not the drawing data for one frame of the image in each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 has been created.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S812, both the 2D creation completion flag and the 3D creation completion flag are cleared to "0" (step S813). After that, drawing data synthesizing processing is executed (step S814). In the drawing data synthesizing process, in the frame region for which the current drawing data is to be created, out of the main first frame region 114 and the main second frame region 115 of the register 93, first, the 3D drawing region 113 is created. 2D drawing data is written, and then the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 is written. In this case, in the 2D drawing area 112, the area in which no image data is set is set with a completely transparent α value. Only the drawing data of the portion corresponding to the pattern image in the 2D drawing area 112 is additionally drawn. When drawing the drawing data of the part corresponding to this pattern image, the area for which the opaque α value is set is overwritten, and the area for which the translucent α value is set is overwritten. Blend processing is performed using the α value. By executing the drawing data synthesizing process, creation of drawing data for displaying an image of one frame on the main display device 41 is completed. As described above, for each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the image data is directly drawn in the frame area to be created out of the first sub frame area 117 and the second sub frame area 118. When the 2D creation completion flag of the register 93 is set to "1" in the drawing process (FIG. 19), creation of drawing data for displaying one frame of image on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is completed. is doing.

<Structure Regarding Handling of Drawing List in Production LSI 85>
Next, a description will be given of a configuration related to handling of the drawing list in the rendering LSI 85. FIG. As already explained, each of the main display device 41 and each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is provided with two frame areas 114, 115, 117 and 118, and one frame area based on drawing data created in one of the frame areas is displayed. In a situation where an image for a frame is being displayed, drawing data for displaying an image for one frame at the next image update timing is created for the other frame region. Image data pre-stored in the memory module 83 is used to create drawing data. It is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86 a of the VRAM 86 .

The timing at which drawing data is created and the timing at which image data is pre-transferred will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 22(a) shows the pre-transfer period of the image data, FIG. 22(b) shows the drawing data creation period, and FIG. 22(c) shows the update timing of the images of the display devices 41, 43 and 44 .

As shown in FIG. 22(c), at each of timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, timing t6, timing t7, timing t8 and timing t9, the main display Updating of images on the device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is started. Also, as shown in FIG. 22(b), drawing data is created at each of these timings t1 to t9. These drawing data are drawing data in a frame order corresponding to the next update timing with respect to the frame order corresponding to the current image update timing. For example, at timing t1, the display devices 41, 43, and 44 update the k-th frame image as shown in FIG. Creation of drawing data for displaying the image of is started. As already explained, each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 employs the double buffer method. Drawing data corresponding to the update timing of the next image is created for the frame area of .

In the configuration in which images are displayed and drawing data is created on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as described above, the image data used in creating the drawing data is the drawing data created using the image data. is read out to the VRAM 86 at a timing before the creation start timing of . There are multiple types of modes of such pre-transfer. One aspect is to read image data used in creating drawing data using a creation period immediately preceding a creation period of drawing data created using the image data. Specifically, at timing t1, as shown in FIG. The reading of the image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying the k+2th frame image to the VRAM 86 is started. Similarly, at timing t2, creation of drawing data for displaying the k+2th frame image is started as shown in FIG. Image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying the image of the th frame is started to be read into the VRAM 86, and at the timing of t3, the image of the k+3 th frame is displayed as shown in FIG. 22(a), the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the k+4th frame is started to be read into the VRAM 86 as shown in FIG. , t4, the generation of drawing data for displaying the k+4th frame image is started as shown in FIG. 22(b). Image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying the image of . According to such an image data reading mode, it is possible to limit the amount of image data that must be read to the VRAM 86 with certainty to two frames.

Another aspect of pre-transfer is that the readout period of image data required to create drawing data for one frame is not limited to the period between one image update timing and the next image update timing. One image update timing while the image data used in creating the data is read out to the VRAM 86 at a timing prior to the start timing of creating the drawing data created using the image data. In this mode, the image data is read across the period between and the next image update timing. In other words, in the period between one image update timing and the next image update timing, reading of the image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying the image of the predetermined frame is completed, and the image data of the predetermined frame is read. In this mode, reading of image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying the image of the next frame to the eye is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, at timing t5, creation of drawing data for displaying the k+5th frame image is started, and at timing t6, the k+6th frame image is displayed. At timing t7, creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k+7th frame is started, and at timing t8, creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k+8th frame is started. Creation of data is started, and at timing t9, creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k+9th frame is started. Image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying images of the k+6th frame to the k+9th frame are read out to the VRAM 86 over the middle of the timing. According to such an image data reading mode, the period required for reading the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the predetermined frame is the difference between one image update timing and the next image update timing. Even if it is longer than the period between image update timings, it is possible to absorb the excess period by using the idle time for reading caused by the period required for reading image data being shorter than the period between image update timings. becomes.

Instructions for advance transfer of image data from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 are made using the drawing list as already described. Information corresponding to the address of the area of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored in association with the type of image data necessary for creating the drawing data is set in the stage drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82. However, information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area of the image data in the VRAM 86 is not set. When the image data is transferred to the VRAM 86 by the advance transfer control unit 94 of the performance LSI 85, the information corresponding to the address of the area of the memory module 83 where the image data is stored is transferred to the VRAM 86 for the image data. It is rewritten with information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area. Then, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the production LSI 85 use the drawing list after the address information has been rewritten to identify the area from which the image data is read in the VRAM 86, and from that area. Drawing data is created using the read image data.

An area for storing the drawing list is set in the register 93 of the rendering LSI 85 in correspondence with such handling of the drawing list. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the area in which the drawing list is stored in the register 93 of the rendering LSI 85. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 23, the register 93 has a pre-transfer storage area 121 in which the drawing lists transmitted from the effect CPU 82 are sequentially stored, and a drawing list stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121. When the pre-transfer of the image data specified in 1 to the VRAM 86 is completed, the drawing list overwritten with the information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area is sequentially stored in the post-transfer storage area 122. and are provided. The pre-transfer storage area 121 is provided with first to twentieth pre-transfer storage areas 121a to 121t, and the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 is sequentially stored in the storage areas 121a to 121t. Specifically, when a new drawing list is transmitted from the effect CPU 82 in a situation where drawing lists are stored up to the mth storage area, the drawing list is stored in the (m+1)th storage area. When the preliminary transfer control unit 94 performs preliminary transfer of the image data specified by the drawing list, the drawing lists stored first in the pre-transfer storage area 121 are sequentially transferred. Specifically, the drawing list stored in the first storage area 121a before transfer is subject to pre-transfer, and when the drawing list is subject to pre-transfer, the first storage area before transfer After clearing 121a to "0", the drawing list stored in the (m+1)th storage area is shifted to the mth storage area. Note that the number of drawing lists that can be stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 is not limited to 20. Any drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 can be processed by the effect LSI 85 . be. Incidentally, in order to display one frame of image on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to one frame of image display and one frame of Since one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to image display are used, a maximum of four storage areas among the first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t before transfer can be used for image display of one frame. Used to store the draw list corresponding to the .

The post-transfer storage area 122 is provided with first to twentieth post-transfer storage areas 122a to 122t. The list is sequentially stored in the storage areas 122a-122t. Specifically, when the advance transfer of image data for one drawing list in the advance transfer control unit 94 is completed in a situation where drawing lists are stored up to the n-th storage area, the address information of the drawing list cannot be rewritten. After being performed, it is stored in the (n+1)th storage area. When drawing data is created by the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97, the drawing list stored first in the post-transfer storage area 122 is sequentially subjected to drawing processing. Specifically, the drawing list stored in the first storage area 122a for post-transfer is subject to execution of drawing processing, and when the drawing list is subject to execution of drawing processing, the first storage area after transfer is selected. After clearing the area 122a to "0", the drawing list stored in the (n+1)th storage area is shifted to the nth storage area. The number of drawing lists that can be stored in the post-transfer storage area 122 is not limited to 20, and the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 can process all the drawing lists that have been pre-transferred. Optional if any. Incidentally, in order to display one frame of image on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to one frame of image display and one frame of Since one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to image display are used, four storage areas among the first to twentieth storage areas 122a to 122t for post-transfer are used for image display of one frame. Used to store the corresponding draw list.

A storage area group for storing the 2D drawing list and a storage area group for storing the 3D drawing list may be separately provided as the post-transfer storage area 122 . In this case, the reading of the 2D drawing list by the 2D control unit 96 and the reading of the 3D drawing list by the 3D control unit 97 are set in the storage area between the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list. can be done independently.

Next, the configuration of the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 to which image data is pre-transferred and the handling of the image data read out to the pre-transfer area 86a will be described. FIG. 24(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pre-transfer area 86a.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the pre-transfer area 86a is set as a partial area of the VRAM86. The pre-transfer area 86a has a storage capacity capable of storing and holding a large number of image data at once. Specifically, 256 data storage areas 123 are provided so that 256 image data can be stored and held at once. Each data storage area 123 has the same storage capacity, and the storage capacity is a capacity capable of storing the maximum storage capacity of image data. In addition, even if there are a plurality of image data whose total storage capacity is smaller than the storage capacity of one data storage area 123 as objects to be read to the pre-transfer area 86a, the plurality of image data , one image data is read out for one data storage area 123 .

When reading the image data according to the drawing list, the advance transfer control unit 94 sequentially changes the data storage area 123 from which the image data is to be read in a predetermined order. Specifically, the data storage areas 123 are set so that the order from 0th to 255th occurs, and the final address in the kth data storage area 123 is the start address in the k+1th data storage area 123. Address and serial number. When one piece of image data is read out to the preliminary transfer area 86a, the preliminary transfer control unit 94 reads out the image data in the next order to the data storage area 123 storing the image data to be read in the previous execution of the preliminary transfer. The image data to be read this time is stored in the data storage area 123 .

In order to specify the type of the data storage area 123 of the read destination, the register 93 of the performance LSI 85 is provided with an identification information counter 124 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24(b). The identification information counter 124 has a data capacity of 1 byte, and can be set to any of the information corresponding to the numbers "0" to "255". When storing one piece of image data in the preliminary transfer area 86 a , the preliminary transfer control section 94 stores the image data in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the information set in the identification information counter 124 . After the image data is stored, the value corresponding to the information set in the identification information counter 124 is incremented by 1, and the storage target of the image data is updated to the data storage area 123 in the next order.

In the configuration in which 255 data storage areas 123 are provided as described above, when the image data is stored in the 255th data storage area 123, in the next pre-transfer processing, the 0th data storage area 123 is stored. Area 123 is the transfer destination of the image data. In this case, the image data already read into the 0th data storage area 123 is erased when new image data is read. However, the number of data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a is set so that the image data whose reading is instructed by the drawing list is not erased without being used when creating the drawing data. Specifically, the pre-transfer mode shown in timings t5 to t9 in FIG. In this mode, the number of data is the largest, and the number of data storage areas 123 is larger than the maximum number of image data assumed in this case. More specifically, 3 frames of image data are read out to the pre-transfer area 86a for the purpose of subsequent use. The number of data storage areas 123 is also large. As a result, even though the image data has been pre-transferred according to the predetermined drawing list, the image data that should have been pre-transferred is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a at the stage of creating the drawing data corresponding to the predetermined drawing list. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the device is stuck.

In a configuration in which 256 data storage areas 123 are provided in the pre-transfer area 86a, an instruction to transfer the same image data as the image data that has already been read into any of the data storage areas 123 can be given using the drawing list. . In this case, if the image data is read out from the memory module 83 and read out to the pre-transfer area 86a, the readout efficiency will be deteriorated. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the image data to which the transfer instruction is given by the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123, the image data is not read from the memory module 83. It has become.

However, as already described, the advance transfer control unit 94 is configured to sequentially update the data storage area 123 from which image data is read out in a predetermined order by referring to the identification information counter 124 of the register 93. . Therefore, if the image data to which the transfer instruction is directed by the drawing list already exists in any of the data storage areas 123, the advance transfer control unit 94 transfers the image data to the data corresponding to the current identification information counter 124. Copy to storage area 123 . That is, although the image data is not read from the memory module 83, the data is copied between the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a. This makes it possible to read out the image data to the data storage area 123 in the order according to the identification information counter 124 and to improve the efficiency of reading out the image data. If the image data to which the transfer instruction is directed by the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the current identification information counter 124, that state is maintained without copying the image data. Meanwhile, only the identification information counter 124 is updated.

In order to enable the preliminary transfer control unit 94 to specify whether or not the image data to which the transfer instruction is directed by the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123, the register 93 of the rendering LSI 85 has A search table 125 is provided. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125. As shown in FIG.

In the search table 125, as shown in FIG. 25, the identification information set in correspondence with the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a on a one-to-one basis is serially numbered according to the order of the data storage areas 123. In addition, an address ID is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of identification information. The address ID is data that enables the preliminary transfer control unit 94 to identify the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 . More specifically, the address ID is information set as the address information of the image data in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82, and the address ID is the area in which the corresponding image data is stored in the memory module 83. corresponds to the starting address of As already explained, when the image data specified in the drawing list is transferred from the memory module 83 to the preliminary transfer area 86a, the preliminary transfer control section 94 transfers the image data from the read area of the preliminary transfer area 86a. The address information of the drawing list is overwritten with the information corresponding to the address. The image data is written in the storage area of the address ID corresponding to the identification information in the data storage area 123 from which the image data was read. As a result, the address ID of the start address corresponding to the image data stored in the data storage area 123 is set in the search table 125 in association with each data storage area 123 . Therefore, by referring to the search table 125, the pre-transfer control unit 94 can identify whether or not the image data, which is the target of the transfer instruction from the drawing list, has already been read into the pre-transfer area 86a. In addition, if the image data has already been read, the type of data storage area 123 from which the image data is read can be specified.

How the address information of the drawing list and the address ID of the search table are rewritten will be described with reference to FIGS. 26(a) to 26(d). FIG. 26(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rendering list transmitted from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85, and FIG. FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125 in this situation, and FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing list after the pre-transfer of the image data is completed and the rewriting of the address information is completed. FIG. 26(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125 in a state after preliminary transfer of image data according to the drawing list is completed.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the drawing list transmitted from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 includes addresses of "A253" to "A257" as address information corresponding to image data with display order priority data of "0". A range of IDs is set, and a range of address IDs from "B348" to "B350" is set as address information corresponding to image data whose display order priority data is "1", and display order priority data is " A range of address IDs from "C001" to "C003" is set as the address information corresponding to the image data of "2". In this case, the image data whose display order priority data is "0" is stored in the area of the address range corresponding to the address ID range of "A253" to "A257" in the memory module 83. is stored in the area of the address range corresponding to the address ID range of "B348" to "B350" in the memory module 83. is stored in the memory module 83 in the area of the address range corresponding to the address ID range of "C001" to "C003".

When pre-transfer of the image data specified in the drawing list of FIG. 26A is performed by the pre-transfer control unit 94, the search table 125 is first referred to so that the image data to be pre-transferred is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a. is already read out to any of the data storage areas 123 of . Since the start address of the address ID is used for this identification, if the display order priority data is "0" for the image data, it is identified whether "A253" is set in the search table 125, and the display order is determined. If the priority data is "1", it specifies whether "B348" is set in the search table 125. If the display order priority data is "2", "C001" is searched. It specifies whether or not it is set in the application table 125 .

In the retrieval table 125 shown in FIG. 26(b), in a situation where the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 from which the image data is read is "123", the rendering list shown in FIG. 26(a) is used. When pre-transferring such image data, the start address (“A253”) of the address ID set for the image data whose display order priority data is “0” is the identification information of “120” in the search table 125. is set as an address ID corresponding to Therefore, the pre-transfer control unit 94 does not read the image data with the display order priority data of "0" from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, but instead reads the data storage area corresponding to the identification information of "120". The image data stored in 123 is copied to the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information of "123". In this case, reading efficiency is improved in that there is no need to read image data from the memory module 83 . Also, the information of the address ID corresponding to the identification information of "123" in the search table 125 is rewritten to the start address of the address ID of the image data as shown in FIG. 26(d). By rewriting the address ID information in the search table 125 in this way, it becomes possible to associate the storage status of the image data in each data storage area 123 with the contents of the search table 125 .

Even if the image data is copied in this way, the image data stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information of "120" is stored as it is, and the identification of "120" in the search table 125 is retained. The information of the address ID corresponding to the information is maintained in "A253". In this case, the search table 125 has a plurality of pieces of identification information whose address ID information is "A253". This identification is performed in order from the identification information with the smallest value. Therefore, if the image data whose starting address of the address ID is "A253" is to be preliminarily transferred, the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information with the smallest value. The image data is copied from the .

On the other hand, for image data with display order priority data of "1" and "2", the start address of the address ID is not set in the search table 125 shown in FIG. 26(b). Therefore, these image data are pre-transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a. When the preliminary transfer is completed, the search table 125 is rewritten, so that the address ID corresponding to the identification information "124" in the search table 125 is changed as shown in FIG. 26(d). "B348" is set as the information, and "C001" is set as the information of the address ID corresponding to the identification information of "125" in the search table 125. FIG.

When each image data is pre-transferred as described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 rewrites the identification information of the drawing list. In this case, as shown in FIG. 26C, identification information corresponding to the type of data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored is included in the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "0". is overwritten. Specifically, since the image data whose display order priority data is "0" has been copied to the data storage area 123 whose identification information corresponds to "123", the address corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "0" "123" is overwritten in the information. In addition, an image other than the decoded image data set as the next display order priority data for the display order priority data in which the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process for the moving image data is set The address information corresponding to the data is also overwritten with the identification information corresponding to the type of the data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored. Note that the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is initially set with information for enabling identification of the address of the area in which the decoded image data is stored in the moving image development area 119 .

On the other hand, the image data is stored in the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later and whose image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not decoded image data. The identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 is not written, but the data indicating "1" is written as the offset value. In the next transfer processing cycle after the image data is read out to the data storage area 123 corresponding to the predetermined identification information, the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information after adding 1 to the predetermined identification information is stored as an image. Data transfer destination. Therefore, the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later and whose image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not decoded image data has an offset value of "1". is written. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information.

A processing configuration for enabling pre-transfer of image data as described above and rewriting of a drawing list after pre-transfer will be described below. First, the drawing list output process executed by the performance CPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the drawing list output process is executed as part of the process of step S507 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14) when it is time to output the drawing list indicated in the execution target table for display control. Incidentally, the mode of outputting the drawing list from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 may be any of the mode shown at timings t1 to t5 in FIG. 22(a) and the mode shown at timings t5 to t9 in FIG. mode is defined in the execution object table for display control.

First, it is determined whether or not each display device 41, 43, 44 is displaying a demonstration (step S901). Demonstration display means a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demonstration without starting the effect for the game cycle or the effect for the opening and closing execution mode after the end of the effect for the game cycle or the effect for the opening and closing execution mode. This is a display effect that is started when (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed. In the demonstration display, the first demonstration period and the second demonstration period alternately occur. In the first demonstration period, in a situation where the same background image is displayed as when the effect for the game round is performed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44, An image in which the symbols stopped on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 perform a predetermined action is displayed for a predetermined period. During the second demonstration period, the display of the image in which the pattern performs a predetermined action in a situation where the predetermined background image is displayed is terminated, and the animation of the maker name, model name, or predetermined character is displayed.

Here, the effect for the game cycle is a state in which a predetermined background image is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 immediately after the supply of operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started, and the main image is displayed. The game starts from a state in which predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the display device 41. FIG. On the other hand, if the demonstration display is performed immediately after the supply of the operating power to the performance CPU 82 is started without the performance for the game round being started, each display device 41 is displayed during the first demonstration period. , 43 and 44 are displayed with the predetermined background image, and an image is displayed in which the predetermined symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 are performing predetermined actions. be done. In addition, regardless of which type of game round effect is executed, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 are displayed at the final timing of the game round effect. A predetermined background image is displayed on each of them, and the symbols corresponding to the stop result are displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the main display device 41 in a stopped manner. Regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode effect is started after the end of the effect for the game cycle, when the effect for the next game cycle is started, the effect for the previous game cycle is completed. It starts from the display state of the image at the timing. Then, when the demonstration display is performed after the effect for the game round is finished, the predetermined background image is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 during the first demonstration period, and the previous game is displayed. When the effect for the round ends, an image is displayed in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 are performing a predetermined action. That is, in the first demonstration period of the demonstration display, the display using the image displayed when starting the effect for the next game round is performed. Therefore, in the first demo period of the demo display, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next game round is read out to the pre-transfer area 86a.

If the demonstration is being displayed (step S901: YES), the value of the counter during demonstration display provided in the work memory 84 is incremented by 1 (step S902). The demonstration display counter is used by the effect CPU 82 to specify that it is time to start the first demonstration period using all of the image data necessary for starting the next game effect. is a counter. If the value of the counter during demonstration display after addition of 1 is the reference value for starting the first demonstration period (step S903: YES), after the value of the counter during demonstration display is cleared to "0" (step S904), the game Data setting is performed so that the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next time is designated in the current drawing list (step S905). As a result, even when the demonstration display is continued, the image data necessary for starting the next game effect are periodically used and read out to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. becomes.

Also, even if the demonstration is not being displayed (step S901: NO), the timing before the end when the supply of operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started or when the ending period is being executed in the effect for the opening/closing execution mode If so (step S906: YES), data setting is performed so that the image data required to start the next game round effect is designated in the current drawing list (step S905). It should be noted that when the process of step S905 is executed during the open/close execution mode, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round next time is set as the target of advance transfer, but is used for creating the drawing data. Not set as a target.

By executing the processing of steps S901 to S906, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is stored in the VRAM 86 at least at the timing at which the effect for the next game round can be started. It is in a state of being read out to the pre-transfer area 86a. This state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 28(a) shows the timing at which the drawing list instructs to read out the image data necessary to start the game round effect, and FIG. 28(b) shows the timing required to start the game round effect. 28(c) shows a period during which the game round effect is executed, and FIG. 28(d) shows the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. is executed, and FIG. 28(e) shows the period during which the demonstration display is executed.

By starting the supply of operating power to the performance CPU 82 at the timing of t1, the image data necessary for starting the performance for the game cycle is preliminarily transferred from the memory module 83 as shown in FIG. 28(a). A read is performed to region 86a. After that, at the timing of t2, the start waiting period elapses without the effect for the game round starting from the timing of t1, so that the demonstration display is started as shown in FIG. 28(e). In the demonstration display, first, the first demonstration period in which the image display using the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next game cycle is started. As shown in a), the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read out.

Here, 256 data storage areas 123 are provided in the pre-transfer area 86a already described, but when image data designated by the drawing list is pre-transferred, the data storage area 123 of the read destination of the image data is not used. is overwritten. On the other hand, as already explained, if the image data whose advance transfer is designated by the drawing list has already been read into any of the data storage areas 123 of the advance transfer area 86a, the image data is stored in the memory module 83. The data is not read from the data storage area 123 but is stored in the data storage area 123 of the read destination by copying between the data storage areas 123 . In this case, since it is not necessary to read the image data from the memory module 83, it is possible to quickly read the image data to the data storage area 123, which is the read destination.

In this case, at the timing of t2, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round, which was pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a at the timing of t1, is stored. Therefore, at timing t2, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. FIG. In addition, since the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 and stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the current value of the identification information counter 124, the image data is stored as data. In order to erase the data from the storage area 123, it is necessary to switch the image data reading target in the data storage area 123 once. In other words, as the timing at which the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next game round is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a, the data storage area 123 has enough margin for switching the reading target of the image data. It will happen.

After that, the first demonstration period is started again at the timing of t3 while the demonstration display is being continued. In this case, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 28(a), image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read out. The first demonstration period is restarted when the value of the counter during demonstration display, which is cleared to "0" at the timing when the first demonstration period was started last time and is periodically updated thereafter, reaches the start reference value. This start reference value is set so that the first demonstration period is started within a range in which all the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next game round next time are stored and held in the preliminary transfer area 86a. there is As a result, while the demonstration display is being executed regardless of the duration of the demonstration display, all the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next game round are read out to the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. It is in a state of With this configuration, at the timing of t3, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game cycle copied between the data storage areas 123 at the timing of t2 is stored and held. ing. Therefore, at timing t3, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. FIG. Further, at the timing of t3, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next game round is copied between the data storage areas 123, and thus the image necessary for starting the effect for the next game round is copied. As for the timing at which the data is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a, there is enough time for switching the image data reading target in the data storage area 123 once.

After that, at the timing of t4, the condition for starting the game round effect is established, so that the demo display ends as shown in FIG. is started. In this case, at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 28(a), image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read out. During the first demo period of the demo display, as already explained, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the next game round is read out to the pre-transfer area 86a, and during the duration of the demonstration display. Regardless, the first demonstration period is restarted so that the image data remains read out to pre-transfer area 86a. Therefore, at timing t4, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the current game round is stored in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. Therefore, at timing t4, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. FIG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28(c), at the timing of t5, it becomes the end timing of the effect for the game cycle. In this case, as already described, even if any type of game round effect is executed, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second display device 43 are displayed during the end period of the game round effect. A predetermined background image is displayed on each of the sub-display devices 44, and the symbols corresponding to the stop result are displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the main display device 41. FIG. That is, the image data for displaying the image has been read into the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. It should be noted that the advance transfer of the image data necessary for displaying the image during the end period of the effect for the game round to the data storage area 123 is carried out according to the form of the advance transfer at the timing of t5 to t9 in FIG. 22(a). It is As a result, even if it takes a certain amount of time to pre-transfer image data necessary for displaying an image during the end period of the effect for the game cycle, the image data can be transferred before the end period of the effect for the game cycle. It is possible to pre-transfer to the data storage area 123 before the start.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 28(c), an effect for a new game cycle is started. In this case, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 28(a), image data necessary for starting the game round effect is read out. As already explained, when a new game round effect is started after the game round effect is finished, the display state of the image is started at the timing when the previous game round effect is finished. Also, the effect for the current game cycle is started without transitioning to the demo display after the effect for the previous game cycle is completed. Therefore, at timing t6, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the current game cycle has been read out to the data storage area 123. Copying is performed, and reading of the image data from the memory module 83 is not performed.

After that, at the timing of t7 when the effect for the game round is being continued, image data necessary for executing the ready-to-win effect etc. in the effect for the current game round as shown in FIG. The image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is erased from the data storage area 123 by the preliminary transfer to the data storage area 123 . However, since the effect for the game cycle continues, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game cycle is used at least until the end period of the effect for the game cycle. does not become

After that, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 28(c), it becomes the end timing of the effect for the game cycle. In this case, as already described, even if any type of game round effect is executed, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second display device 43 are displayed during the end period of the game round effect. A predetermined background image is displayed on each of the sub-display devices 44, and the symbols corresponding to the stop result are displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the main display device 41. FIG. That is, the image data for displaying the image has been read into the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. The advance transfer of the image data necessary for displaying the image during the end period of the effect for the game round to the data storage area 123 is carried out according to the form of the advance transfer at the timing of t5 to t9 in FIG. 22(a). It is As a result, even if it takes a certain amount of time to pre-transfer image data necessary for displaying an image during the end period of the effect for the game cycle, the image data can be transferred before the end period of the effect for the game cycle. It is possible to pre-transfer to the data storage area 123 before the start.

Since the current game round corresponds to the result of the big win, the opening/closing execution mode effect is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 28(d). After that, at the timing of t9 when the effect for the open/close execution mode is being continued, as shown in FIG. is erased from the data storage area 123 . However, since the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being continued, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game cycle is used at least until the end timing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. not be in a situation where

After that, at the timing of t10, it becomes a predetermined pre-end timing in the case where the ending period is executed in the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Image data necessary for starting the effect for the round is read out to the data storage area 123 . This image data is stored and retained at least until the effect for the opening/closing execution mode ends and the effect for a new game cycle or demonstration display is started.

After that, at the timing of t11, the effect for the open/close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 28(d), and the effect for the new game round starts as shown in FIG. 28(c). In this case, at the timing t11, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read out as shown in FIG. 28(a). Therefore, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 and the image data is not read from the memory module 83 .

As described above, even if the image data pre-transferred to the data storage area 123 is sequentially erased along with the pre-transfer of other image data, at the timing of starting the effect for the game round, The image data necessary for starting the effect for the game has already been read into the data storage area 123 . As a result, even if it takes a certain amount of time to read out the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game from the memory module 83, the image data for the game will not be read out due to the influence of the readout period of the image data. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the start of the performance is delayed.

Returning to the description of the rendering list output process (FIG. 27), if a negative determination is made in step S903, if the process of step S905 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S906, 2D image data aggregation Processing is executed (step S907). In the aggregation process, all image data to be set in the 2D drawing list are specified in the current process. In this case, when the process of step S905 is being executed, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round and used in the drawing process of the 2D control unit 96 is collected as described above. Included in specific targets in processing.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of pieces of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S908). Note that the reference number is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of numbers. If the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is less than the reference number (step S908: NO), one 2D drawing list is created (step S909). All of the 2D image data aggregated in step S907 are set in the single 2D drawing list. Then, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 2D drawing list (step S910). As already explained, the 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not creation completion data has been set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19), thereby obtaining one or two 2D images corresponding to image display for one frame. It specifies that rendering processing has been completed for all image data specified in the rendering list.

On the other hand, if the number of pieces of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is greater than or equal to the reference number (step S908: YES), two 2D drawing lists are created (step S911). In this case, the 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is dispersed and set in two 2D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. The number of pieces of image data in both of these two 2D rendering lists is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 sets the creation completion data to the 2D drawing list to be subjected to drawing processing later (step S912). Specifically, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 2D drawing list. As already explained, the 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not creation completion data has been set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19), thereby obtaining one or two 2D images corresponding to image display for one frame. It specifies that rendering processing has been completed for all image data specified in the rendering list.

As described above, if the number of pieces of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is less than the reference number, the image data are set in one 2D drawing list. By dispersing and setting the image data in the list, it is possible to suppress the number of pieces of image data set in one 2D drawing list to less than the reference number. As a result, even if the number of pieces of 2D image data required to display one frame of image varies, the data capacity of one 2D drawing list can be reduced to a predetermined capacity or less. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data volume of one 2D drawing list transmitted from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 from becoming extremely large. It is possible to prevent the transmission period from becoming extremely long.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S910 or step S912 is executed, the 3D image data aggregation process is executed (step S913). In the aggregation process, all the image data to be set in the 3D drawing list are specified in the current process. In this case, when the process of step S905 is executed, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round and used in the drawing process of the 3D control unit 97 is collected. Included in specific targets in processing.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of pieces of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S914). Note that the reference number is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of numbers. If the number of pieces of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is less than the reference number (step S914: NO), one 3D drawing list is created (step S915). All of the 3D image data aggregated in step S913 are set in the single 3D rendering list. Then, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 3D rendering list (step S916). As already explained, the 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not creation completion data has been set in the 3D rendering process (FIG. 20), thereby obtaining one or two 3D images corresponding to image display for one frame. It specifies that rendering processing has been completed for all image data specified in the rendering list.

On the other hand, if the number of pieces of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is greater than or equal to the reference number (step S914: YES), two 3D drawing lists are created (step S917). In this case, the 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is distributed and set in two 3D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. The number of pieces of image data in both of these two 3D rendering lists is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 sets the creation completion data to the 3D drawing list to be subjected to drawing processing later (step S918). Specifically, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 3D drawing list. As already explained, the 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not creation completion data has been set in the 3D rendering process (FIG. 20), thereby obtaining one or two 3D images corresponding to image display for one frame. It specifies that rendering processing has been completed for all image data specified in the rendering list.

As described above, if the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is less than the reference number, the image data are set in one 3D drawing list. By dispersing and setting the image data in the list, it is possible to suppress the number of pieces of image data set in one 3D rendering list to less than the reference number. As a result, even if the number of pieces of 3D image data required to display one frame of image varies, the data capacity of one 3D drawing list can be reduced to a predetermined capacity or less. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data volume of one 3D drawing list transmitted from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 from becoming extremely large. It is possible to prevent the transmission period from becoming extremely long.

When the process of step S916 is executed or when the process of step S918 is executed, the drawing list to be output to the rendering LSI 85 is grasped (step S919). In this case, at least one 2D drawing list and one 3D drawing list are grasped, and at most two 2D drawing lists and two 3D drawing lists are grasped. After that, a process for outputting one of the plurality of drawing lists grasped in step S919 to the rendering LSI 85 is executed (step S920). If all the drawing lists grasped in step S919 have not been completely output to the rendering LSI 85 (step S921: YES), the process of step S920 is continued until the output of all drawing lists is completed. repeat. As a result, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame is output.

In this case, one 2D drawing list and one 3D drawing list may alternately be output. With this configuration, even if at least one of the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list is two as a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame, the rendering LSI 85 can display the 2D drawing list. The drawing list for 3D and the drawing list for 3D are alternately transmitted. By transmitting the drawing list in this manner, the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list are alternately stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 and the post-transfer storage area 122 of the register 93. becomes. As a result, for example, after the 2D control unit 96 reads out the 2D drawing list from the first storage area 122a after transfer in the storage area 122 for after transfer, the 3D drawing list is stored in the first storage area 122a after transfer. is shifted, and the 3D drawing list can be read out in the 3D control unit 97 . Therefore, it is possible for the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 to execute drawing processing at the same time.

Next, advance transfer processing executed by the advance transfer control section 94 of the performance LSI 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pre-transfer control unit 94 uses programs and data pre-stored in the memory module 83 to periodically (for example, every 2 msec) perform pre-transfer processing. All of these programs and data are read out to a register provided inside the preliminary transfer control section 94 when the supply of operating power to the performance LSI 85 is started. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the advance transfer control unit 94 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83 .

In the advance transfer process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a drawing list for which advance transfer has not been completed (step S1001). Specifically, if pre-transfer processing for one drawing list has started but pre-transfer processing for all image data set in that one drawing list has not been completed, pre-transfer This means that there is a drawing list whose transfer has not been completed. Further, even if the pre-transfer processing for one drawing list has been completed, the pre-transfer storage area 121 (see FIG. 23) in the register 93 of the rendering LSI 85 still has the pre-transfer processing. If there is a drawing list that is not to be executed, it means that there is a drawing list that has not been pre-transferred.

If there is an incomplete drawing list (step S1001: YES), image data to be pre-transferred in this pre-transfer process is grasped (step S1002). In this case, if the timing is in the middle of pre-transfer processing for one drawing list, the display order priority data is next to the image data that was the target of pre-transfer processing in the previous processing in that drawing list. The image data in the order of is grasped as the target of this advance transfer. Also, when it is time to start pre-transfer processing for a new drawing list, the image data whose display order priority data is the first in that drawing list is grasped as the object of this pre-transfer.

If the image data to be pre-transferred ascertained in step S1002 is decoded image data created by executing decoding processing on moving image data (step S1003: YES), steps S1004 to S1015. , the process proceeds to step S1016. On the other hand, if the image data to be pre-transferred ascertained in step S1002 is not decoded image data (step S1003: NO), the value of the identification information counter 124 (see FIG. 24B) of the register 93 is set to 1. Add (step S1004). If the value of the identification information counter 124 after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of the identification information counter 124 (step S1005: YES), the value of the identification information counter 124 is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

If a negative determination is made in step S1005, or if the process of step S1006 is executed, the address information set in the drawing list corresponding to the image data to be transferred in advance grasped in step S1002 can be referred to. , the start address in the range of address IDs corresponding to the image data is grasped (step S1007). Then, by executing the matching process of the search table 125 (FIG. 25), it is specified whether or not the start address is set in correspondence with any identification information of the search table 125 (see FIG. 25). (step S1008).

If it is determined in the collation process that the start address is not set in the search table 125 (step S1009: NO), read setting process from the memory module 83 is executed (step S1010). Specifically, the range of address IDs set in the address information of the drawing list is output to the transfer controller 92 in association with the current image data to be pre-transferred. In addition, the current value of the identification information counter 124 in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is output to the transfer controller 92 as identification information in order to make the transfer controller 92 recognize the transfer destination of the image data to be pre-transferred this time. . As a result, the image data to be preliminarily transferred this time is read from the memory module 83 and the read image data is written in the area of the transfer destination this time in the data storage area 123 . The details of the processing of the transfer controller 92 for transferring the image data will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the collation process of step S1008 that the start address is set in the search table 125 (step S1009: YES), the copy setting process in the pre-transfer area 86a is executed (step S1011). Specifically, the image data stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information for which the start address is set in the search table 125 is stored as data corresponding to the current value of the identification information counter 124. It gives an instruction to transfer controller 92 to copy to area 123 . In this case, the identification information corresponding to the copy source data storage area 123 and the identification information corresponding to the copy destination data storage area 123 are output to the transfer controller 92 . As a result, the image data to be pre-transferred this time is written in the current transfer destination area in the data storage area 123 without reading the image data from the memory module 83 .

When the process of step S1010 or step S1011 is executed, the rewriting process of the search table 125 is executed (step S1012). Specifically, for the information of the address ID in the search table 125 corresponding to the data storage area 123 which is the current transfer destination area, the image data to be pre-transferred this time is associated with the drawing list. Overwrites the start address information in the range of address IDs set in the address information. This makes it possible to match the contents of the search table 125 with the contents of the types of image data actually stored in each data storage area 123 .

After that, on condition that the image data to be pre-transferred this time is moving image data (step S1013: YES), an instruction to decode the moving image data is issued to the moving image decoder 95 of the effect LSI 85 ( step S1014). At the time of this decoding instruction, information for enabling the moving image decoder 95 to specify the area in the data storage area 123 where the moving image data to be decoded this time is stored, and information for the moving image in the register 93. Information is provided to the moving image decoder 95 so that the moving image decoder 95 can specify an area for storing the decoded image data obtained by decoding the moving image data in the decompression area 119 . As a result, the video decoder 95 executes the decoding process on the moving image data to be decoded, and the decoded image data created by the decoding process is transferred to the area specified in the moving image development area 119. written.

When a negative determination is made in step S1013, or when the processing of step S1014 is executed, address information rewrite processing is executed (step S1015). FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing rewriting processing of address information.

In the address information rewriting process, the image data to be pre-transferred this time is the image data set in correspondence with the first display order priority data in the drawing list, and the immediately preceding display order priority data. It is determined whether the data is any of the set image data (step S1101). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, identification information corresponding to the type of data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored this time is added to the address information corresponding to the image data to be pre-transferred this time in the drawing list. is overwritten (step S1102).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1101, the data indicating that the offset value for the identification information in the data storage area 123 to which the image data corresponding to the previous display order priority data has been pre-transferred is "1" is It is written to the address information corresponding to the image data to be pre-transferred this time in the drawing list. By uniformly writing the data indicating that the offset value is "1" instead of writing the identification information in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information. . On the other hand, for the image data set corresponding to the first display order priority data in the drawing list, since no image data is set before that, the address information is overwritten with the identification information as described above. Also, since the decoded image data is stored in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93, the address of the corresponding area in the moving image expansion area 119 is set as the address information of the decoded image data. Therefore, since the address information cannot be specified by the offset value for the image data for which the decoded image data is set in the immediately preceding display order priority data, the address information is overwritten with the identification information as described above.

Returning to the description of the pre-transfer processing (FIG. 29), if the determination in step S1003 is affirmative, or after the address information rewriting processing is executed in step S1015, one rendering list will be processed in this processing. On condition that advance transfer is completed (step S1016: YES), advance transfer completion processing is executed (step S1017). In the pre-transfer completion process, the drawing list for which pre-transfer has been completed this time is stored in the current storage target storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23) in the post-transfer storage area 122 of the register 93. FIG. As a result, the drawing list becomes a target for subsequent execution of drawing processing by the 2D control unit 96 or drawing processing by the 3D control unit 97 . In the pre-transfer completion process, if a drawing list for which pre-transfer has not been completed exists in the pre-transfer storage area 121 of the register 93, a new drawing list is created from the pre-transfer first storage area 121a. are read out, and a process for shifting the drawing list among the first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t in the pre-transfer storage area 121 is executed.

<Effect of configuration regarding handling of drawing list in production LSI 85>
The image data stored in advance in the memory module 83 is transferred to the advance transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, so that the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 can directly read out the image data from the memory module 83 when using the image data. Instead, it should be read from the pre-transfer area 86a. In this case, if the predetermined image data is to be instructed to be transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, and if the predetermined image data is not stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer area is transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a. Predetermined image data is read out to 86a, and if the predetermined image data has already been stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the predetermined image data is not transferred from the memory module 83. FIG. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined image data from being further transferred from the memory module 83 even though the predetermined image data has already been stored in the pre-transfer area 86a. It is possible to improve the efficiency of reading image data from the module 83 .

When a transfer instruction is issued for image data that has already been read into one of the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. be. As a result, the image data can be stored in the data storage area 123 specified as the transfer instruction while further reading of the image data from the memory module 83 is unnecessary.

A search table 125 is provided in which data corresponding to the types of image data stored in each data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is set. is stored in any of the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. As a result, it is possible to efficiently identify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction has already been read into the pre-transfer area 86a.

When image data is transferred to one of the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a, the correspondence relationship between the data storage area 123 that is the transfer destination and the type of image data is reflected. , the contents of the search table 125 are updated. This allows the contents of the search table 125 to correspond to the latest storage state of the pre-transfer area 86a.

In the drawing list, an address ID for specifying an area in which the image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as information corresponding to the image data to be used. When the image data is transferred from the pre-transfer area 86a to the pre-transfer area 86a, the area in which the image data is stored in the memory module 83 is specified using the address ID. In this case, information set as the address ID is set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 . As a result, the address ID provided in the drawing list is used when specifying whether or not the image data to be transferred is stored in the pre-transfer area 86a using the search table 125. can be used as is. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when performing the identification.

In a configuration in which a plurality of address IDs corresponding to areas stored in the memory module 83 are set in association with one image data to be used in the drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82, the data Information set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the storage area 123 is only the address ID corresponding to the start address. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 in the search table 125, and to determine whether the image data is stored in the pre-transfer area 86a. It is possible to reduce the processing load when referring to the search table 125 in order to identify whether or not.

The image data necessary for starting the effect for the game cycle is periodically read out to the pre-transfer area 86a during the demonstration display, and is read out to the pre-transfer area 86a at the timing before the end of the opening/closing execution mode. read target. As a result, even if the image data pre-transferred to the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is sequentially erased in accordance with the pre-transfer of other image data, the timing for starting the effect for the game cycle. In , the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game cycle has already been read to the data storage area 123 . As a result, even if it takes a certain amount of time to read out the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game from the memory module 83, the image data for the game will not be read out due to the influence of the readout period of the image data. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the start of the performance is delayed.

When the image data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 in accordance with the address ID set in the drawing list provided by the performance CPU 82, the pre-transfer control unit 94 transfers the image data in the pre-transfer area 86a. The identification information for specifying the area where the data is stored is set in the drawing list. Since it is not necessary to set both the address ID and the identification information in the drawing list from the beginning, the amount of information in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 can be reduced. Further, when the image data is actually transferred to the preliminary transfer area 86a, the identification information corresponding to the area of the preliminary transfer area 86a to which the image data was transferred is set in the drawing list. Reliability can be improved.

When the image data is transferred to the preliminary transfer area 86a according to the address ID of the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, the identification information corresponding to the area of the preliminary transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred is It is set as the address information of the drawing list so as to overwrite the address ID. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the drawing list provided to the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97 after the transfer of the image data is completed.

The amount of identification information overwritten on the address information in the drawing list when the transfer of the image data is completed is smaller than the address ID initially set in the drawing list. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when the address information is overwritten with the identification information in the advance transfer control unit 94 .

The register 93 has a pre-transfer storage area 121 for storing the drawing list provided by the production CPU 82, and a post-transfer storage area 122 for storing the drawing list for which the setting of the identification information by the pre-transfer control unit 94 is completed. are provided separately. As a result, the area for storing the drawing list provided by the presentation CPU 82 and the drawing list in which the identification information has been set after the preliminary transfer of the image data is clearly distinguished. It becomes possible to distinguish clearly.

The decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is stored in the developing area 119 for moving images in the register 93 . In this case, the decoded image data is excluded from being pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a by the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the process of setting identification information to the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pre-transfer control unit 94 from wastefully setting information for the address information of the drawing list.

The address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list and whose image data corresponding to the display order priority data immediately before is not decoded image data has an offset value of "1". ” is written. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information.

In a configuration where the image data is stored over a plurality of areas in the VRAM 86, when the transfer of the image data to the VRAM 86 is completed, the identification information corresponding to the plurality of areas is set as the address information of the drawing list. In this case, since a plurality of areas in the VRAM 86 are configured to be specified as a group of storage areas using identification information, compared to a configuration in which all addresses corresponding to the plurality of areas are set, the pre-transfer control unit 94 , it is possible to suppress the amount of information set in the address information of the drawing list.

A plurality of drawing lists are provided from the production CPU 82 to the production LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the amount of information in one drawing list provided from the presentation CPU 82 from becoming excessively large, and to prevent various types of information from being mixed in one drawing list. It is possible to prevent the processing load of the performance LSI 85 from increasing.

Information necessary for causing the 2D control unit 96 to execute 2D drawing processing is provided as a 2D drawing list from the presentation CPU 82, and information necessary for causing the 3D control unit 97 to execute 3D drawing processing is provided as a 3D drawing list. It is provided from the effect CPU 82 as a drawing list. As a result, it is possible to identify which of the 2D rendering process and the 3D rendering process the image data to be used corresponds to in units of rendering lists. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when specifying the type of image data in the rendering LSI 85 .

When the number of 2D image data to be used at one update timing is equal to or greater than the reference number, the 2D image data are distributed and set in a plurality of 2D drawing lists. Further, when the number of 3D image data to be used at one update timing is equal to or greater than the reference number, the 3D image data are distributed and set in a plurality of 3D drawing lists. As a result, the amount of information in one drawing list provided from the performance CPU 82 can be suppressed to a certain extent, and the transmission period of one drawing list is prevented from becoming extremely long. becomes possible.

Even if a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided to display an image at one update timing, the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are is set in the last 2D drawing list or the last 3D drawing list so that the effect LSI 85 can specify that the data will be collectively used at the update timing of . This enables the effect LSI 85 to recognize that the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are for displaying an image at one update timing.

The function of pre-transferring image data according to the drawing list provided by the presentation CPU 82 is assigned to the advance transfer control unit 94, and the function of creating drawing data according to the drawing list is assigned to the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97. assigned to. This makes it possible to disperse the processing load compared to a configuration in which these processes are collectively executed by one control means.

The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute drawing processing using the drawing list for which the advance transfer of image data has been completed by the advance transfer control unit 94 . This makes it possible to distribute the functions of each process to a plurality of control means without providing a plurality of identical drawing lists from the production CPU 82 .

<Configuration regarding transfer controller 92>
Next, a configuration for transferring data in the transfer controller 92 of the performance LSI 85 will be described.

As already explained, the image data is pre-transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 based on the control of the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 pre-transfer the VRAM 86 when creating drawing data. Image data is read from the area 86a, and the moving image decoder 95 reads the moving image data from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 when decoding the moving image data. In addition to reading the image data, the light emission decoder 101 pre-transfers the light emission data from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 and reads the pre-transferred light emission data from the VRAM 86 when decoding the light emission data. Further, the sound decoder 103 pre-transfers the sound output data from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 and reads out the pre-transferred sound output data from the VRAM 86 when the sound output data is decoded. The process of reading these various data is executed in the transfer controller 92 .

Here, as already explained, an address ID corresponding to the physical address of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is set as the address information of the image data in the drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. and the physical address itself is not set. As described above, the memory module 83 stores data other than image data, and also has areas in which no data is stored. Then, a part of the area of the memory module 83 is used as an area for storing image data. narrower range than In such a configuration, the address ID specified as address information in the drawing list is information for specifying only the area in the memory module 83 where the image data is stored. In this case, the number of address IDs that can be used is less than the number of physical addresses in the memory module 83, so that the data capacity for specifying one address ID is less than the data capacity for specifying a physical address. be smaller than By reducing the data capacity for designating one address ID, the data capacity of the address information designated in the drawing list can be reduced, and as a result, the data capacity of the drawing list can be reduced. becomes possible.

Since the pre-transfer control unit 94 uses the address ID as information for specifying the address of the area in which the image data is stored in the memory module 83, the image data from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is transferred. , to the transfer controller 92, the address ID is provided to the transfer controller 92 concerned. The transfer controller 92 is set with a file table 126 that defines the correspondence between address IDs and physical addresses, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The file table 126 has a one-to-one correspondence with address IDs (ID(0), ID(1), ID(2), . ), AD(1), AD(2), . . . , AD(n+2)) are set. By referring to the file table 126, the transfer controller 92 specifies the physical address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID specified by the advance transfer control unit 94, and reads the image data from the specified physical address area. I do.

The above address conversion in the transfer controller 92 is performed not only for the memory module 83 but also for the VRAM 86 . This content will be described below. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the VRAM 86 and the index area.

As shown in FIG. 32, the VRAM 86 is partitioned into a plurality of index areas 127a-127c. Specifically, it is divided into three areas: a first index area 127a, a second index area 127b, and a third index area 127c. The area included in the first index area 127a is an area of the VRAM 86 with consecutive physical addresses, and the area included in the second index area 127b is an area of the VRAM 86 with consecutive physical addresses. An area that is not included in the first index area 127a and is included in the third index area 127c is an area in which the physical addresses are continuous in the area of the VRAM 86, and is the first index area 127a and the second index area 127b. This is an area not included in the Also, the final address of the area included in the first index area 127a is continuous with the start address of the area included in the second index area 127b, and the final address of the area included in the second index area 127b. The address is continuous with the start address of the area contained in the third index area 127c. The first index area 127a is used as an area to which light emission data is pre-transferred, and the second index area 127b is used as an area to which sound output data is pre-transferred. Also, the third index area 127c is used as an area to which image data is pre-transferred. That is, the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is the third index area 127c.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index table 128 which defines the correspondence between the index areas 127a to 127c and the physical addresses of the VRAM 86. As shown in FIG. Note that the index table 128 is set in the transfer controller 92 .

As shown in FIG. 33, identification information is set in each of the first index area 127a, the second index area 127b, and the third index area 127c. The identification information of the first index area 127a is used when the light emission decoder 101 reads the light emission data to the VRAM 86 and specifies the read destination area of the light emission data in the VRAM 86 to the transfer controller 92. It is used to indicate to the transfer controller 92 the area in the VRAM 86 from which the data for light emission is read out from the VRAM 86 in the decoder 101 for light emission. The identification information of the second index area 127b is used when the audio decoder 103 reads out the sound output data to the VRAM 86 and designates the read destination area in the VRAM 86 of the sound output data to the transfer controller 92. When the sound output data is read out from the VRAM 86 in the audio decoder 103, it is used to instruct the transfer controller 92 of the read source area in the VRAM 86 of the sound output data. The identification information of the third index area 127c is used to indicate to the transfer controller 92 the read destination area in the VRAM 86 of the image data when the image data is read to the VRAM 86 by the preliminary transfer control unit 94, and is used for the 2D control. This is used to indicate to the transfer controller 92 the read source area in the VRAM 86 of the image data when the image data is read from the VRAM 86 in the unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 . It is also used to instruct the transfer controller 92 of the storage source and storage destination areas of the image data when the preliminary transfer control unit 94 copies the image data between the data storage areas 123 in the preliminary transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. be done.

The identification information of each of the first index area 127a, the second index area 127b, and the third index area 127c is associated with a plurality of continuous physical address areas in the VRAM86. For example, the identification information of "0" in the first index area 127a is associated with five consecutive physical address areas A(0) to A(4), and "0" in the second index area 127b. is associated with five consecutive physical address areas A(640) to A(644), and the identification information of "0" in the third index area 127c is A(1920) to A( 1924) are associated with five consecutive physical address areas. The number of physical addresses associated with each piece of identification information is fixed at five. However, the number of physical addresses associated with the identification information may be different for each type of the index areas 127a to 127c.

Since the number of physical addresses associated with one piece of identification information is plural in this way, when instructing the transfer controller 92 to read data to or from the VRAM 86, the instructing side makes it possible to specify an area corresponding to a plurality of physical addresses only by specifying one identification information without specifying a plurality of physical addresses. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required for specifying the area.

While the number of identification information set in the first index area 127a is 128, the number of identification information set in the second index area 127b and the identification information set in the third index area 127c are 128 pieces. The number of pieces of information is 256 respectively. That is, the number of set identification information differs depending on the type of the index areas 127a to 127c. In addition, since the number of physical addresses associated with each piece of identification information is the same as described above, the physical addresses of the VRAM 86 assigned to each of the index areas 127a to 127c are determined according to the types of the index areas 127a to 127c. are different. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of identification information set in each of the index areas 127a to 127c may be the same. may have the same total number.

In the configuration in which the index areas 127a to 127c are set as described above, when the transfer controller 92 receives an instruction to read data from the VRAM 86 or an instruction to read data from the VRAM 86, the transfer controller 92 receives an instruction to read data from the VRAM 86. is to be read out. Specifically, the transfer controller 92 specifies the first index area 127a as a read target when receiving an instruction from the decoder for light emission 101, and specifies the second index area when receiving an instruction from the decoder for sound 103. 127b is specified as a read target, and when an instruction is received from any one of the advance transfer control unit 94, 2D control unit 96, and 3D control unit 97, the third index area 127c is specified as a read target. The transfer controller 92 may have any configuration for specifying the object receiving the instruction, but for example, information for identifying the side giving the instruction is set in the data for giving the instruction to the transfer controller 92. configuration is conceivable. Since the side that gives the instruction to the transfer controller 92 designates only the identification information without designating the type of the index areas 127a to 127c, the side that gives the instruction needs to specify the area to the transfer controller 92. Data volume can be suppressed.

The transfer execution process executed by the transfer controller 92 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Although the transfer controller 92 is provided as a dedicated circuit in which a circuit for executing transfer execution processing is preset, the transfer controller 92 is not limited to this, and can transfer programs and data stored in the memory module 83 or the like. It may be configured to be provided as a general-purpose circuit that is used to execute transfer execution processing.

In the transfer execution process, if an instruction to read data from the memory module 83 has been received (step S1201: YES), if the read instruction has been received from the preliminary transfer control unit 94 (step S1202: YES), The physical address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID received from the transfer control unit 94 is identified by referring to the file table 126 (step S1203). On the other hand, when the read instruction is received from other than the advance transfer control unit 94, the physical address of the memory module 83 is received from the side issuing the read instruction.

After that, the type of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified from the type of the target for which the read instruction is issued, and the identification information received from the side issuing the read instruction is specified. Then, the physical address group of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination of the types of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information is identified from the index table 128 (step S1204).

After that, read start processing from the memory module 83 is executed (step S1205). In this case, an address signal for specifying the physical address of the area where the data to be read is stored in the memory module 83 and a data read instruction signal are transmitted to the memory module 83 . As a result, the data to be read this time is output from the memory module 83 . Then, the output data is written in the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the physical address group identified in step S1204.

When reading of the data to be read this time is completed (step S1206: YES), the corresponding read completion flag provided in the register 93 is set to "1" (step S1207). As a result, the side that gave the read instruction specifies that the reading of the data to be read to the VRAM 86 has been completed. It should be noted that when it is specified that reading of the data to be read has been completed on the side that gave the read instruction, the read completion flag is cleared to "0".

In the transfer execution process, if an instruction to read data from the VRAM 86 has been received (step S1208: YES), the type of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified from the type of object for which the read instruction is being issued, and the read instruction is issued. identify the identifying information received from the party Then, the physical address group of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination of the types of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information is specified from the index table 128 (step S1209). Also, the information of the write target area received from the side issuing the read instruction is specified (step S1210). In this case, the register 93 is an area to be written. Further, when the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the preliminary transfer area 86a under the control of the preliminary transfer control section 94, the area to be written becomes the data storage area 123, that is, the third index area 127c. .

After that, read start processing from the VRAM 86 is executed (step S1211). In this case, an address signal for specifying the physical address group specified in step S1209 and a data read instruction signal are transmitted to the VRAM86. As a result, the data to be read this time is output from the VRAM 86 . Then, the output data is written in the write target area specified in step S1210.

When reading of the data to be read this time is completed (step S1212: YES), the corresponding read completion flag provided in the register 93 is set to "1" (step S1213). As a result, the side that gave the read instruction specifies that reading of the data to be read from the VRAM 86 has been completed. Note that when it is specified that the reading of the data to be read has been completed on the side that gave the read instruction, the read completion flag is cleared to "0".

<Effects of Configuration Regarding Transfer Controller 92>
Each area of the VRAM 86 is divided into a plurality of index areas 127a to 127c, and each area included in each of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified using identification information set for each of the index areas 127a to 127c. It is possible. Then, when it is necessary to read data from the VRAM 86 in the control execution units such as the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, the transfer controller 92 is notified of the types of the index areas 127a to 127c and the contents of the index areas 127a to 127c. By designating the identification information set in , the transfer controller 92 specifies the area of the VRAM 86 in which the data to be read is stored. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information required for specifying the area from which data is to be read in the control execution unit.

In addition, one piece of identification information in each of the index areas 127a to 127c is information for designating a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 collectively. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information required to specify the area from which data is to be read, as compared with the case where addresses are specified for each of the plurality of areas and data is read from the plurality of areas.

A plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 included in one index area 127a to 127c are areas having consecutive addresses. A plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 designated by one piece of identification information are areas having consecutive addresses. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for identifying the areas of the VRAM 86 designated by the types of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information.

The correspondence between the areas of the VRAM 86 with respect to combinations of the information on the types of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information of the respective index areas 127a to 127c is set in the index table 128, and the transfer controller 92 refers to the index table 128. By doing so, the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the above combination is specified. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the area of the VRAM 86 from which data is to be read in the transfer controller 92 .

A plurality of index areas 127a to 127c are set. This makes it possible to set the index areas 127a to 127c corresponding to their respective purposes. Also, the number of areas of the VRAM 86 included in the index areas 127a to 127c differs depending on the type thereof. This makes it possible to set the sizes of the index areas 127a to 127c to sizes suitable for their respective purposes.

<Structure for Displaying Images on Multiple Display Devices 41, 43, 44>
Next, a configuration for collectively updating the images on the plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44 when it is time to update the images will be described.

As described above, images are updated in all of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 at each update timing. A drawing list is output from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 in order to update the image. Instead, image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 are collectively set in one or two drawing lists. This makes it possible to reduce the number of drawing lists compared to a configuration in which drawing lists are created individually for each of the display devices 41 , 43 and 44 .

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of one drawing list in which the image data corresponding to the respective display devices 41, 43 and 44 are collected and set. As shown in FIG. 35, as the image data for the background image which is the object of the drawing instruction, first background image data for the main, first background image data for the first sub, and first background image data for the second sub. Background image data, second background image data for main, second background image data for first sub, second background image data for second sub, third background image data for main, and 3rd background image data for 1 sub and 3rd background image data for 2 sub are set. The first to third background image data for main are image data for displaying a background image on the main display device 41, and the first to third background image data for the first sub are displayed on the first sub display device 43. This is image data for displaying a background image, and the first to third background image data for the second sub are image data for displaying the background image on the second sub-display device 44 . The second background image data is image data corresponding to an image displayed such that the first background image data exists on the farthest side in each of the main, first sub, and second sub uses. is image data corresponding to an image displayed as if it exists in front of it, and the third background image data is image data corresponding to an image displayed as if it exists in front of it. .

As described above, display order priority data indicating the drawing order of image data, parameter information, and address information are set in the drawing list for each image data to be drawn. However, in a configuration in which image data corresponding to two or more display devices 41, 43, 44 are set for one drawing list, the image data specified in the drawing list is , 44 is not set in the drawing list. Instead, the display order priority data, which is data indicating the drawing order of the image data, is used to specify the type of display device 41, 43, 44 on which each image data is to be drawn.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, for image data such as the first to third main background image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the value of the display order priority data is the first display target reference value. It is set to less than "100". Also, regarding the image data such as the first to third background image data for the first sub display device 43, the value of the display order priority data must be greater than or equal to "100", which is the first display target reference value. is set to less than "200", which is the second display target reference value. For the image data such as the first to third background image data for the second sub display device 44, the value of the display order priority data is set to "200" or higher, which is the second display target reference value. It is

The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the rendering LSI 85 grasp the value of the display order priority data in relation to the first display target reference value and the second display target reference value, thereby determining the target of the drawing instruction in the drawing list. It is possible to grasp which of the display devices 41, 43 and 44 the corresponding image data corresponds to. By specifying the type of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 on which each image data is to be rendered using the display order priority data as described above, the image data corresponds to any of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. There is no need to set dedicated data in the draw list to indicate whether the This makes it possible to simplify the data configuration of the drawing list. Incidentally, the maximum number of image data set as objects to be drawn on the main display device 41 in one drawing list is equal to or less than the first display object reference value (100 or less). The maximum number of pieces of image data to be drawn on the sub-display device 43 is equal to or less than the difference between the second display target reference value and the first display target reference value (100 or less).

The drawing data as described above is created by the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the effect CPU 82, and the information referred to for creating the drawing list is the execution object table for display control as already explained. is set to The presentation CPU 82 derives various data to be set in the drawing list by referring to the display control execution object table in the display control task process (step S506) in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

FIGS. 36A and 36B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution target table for display control. As shown in FIG. 36(a), in the execution target table for display control, information on task contents is set in one-to-one correspondence with pointer information. The pointer information is information for the production CPU 82 to specify which task content information should be referred to in each processing in the task processing for display control (step S506). When a new execution target table for display control becomes a use target, the information on the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information "0" is referred to, and then the task processing for display control (step S506) is performed. Each time a new cycle is executed, the pointer information to be referenced is updated so as to be incremented by 1, and task processing for display control is performed by referring to the information on the contents of the task corresponding to the updated pointer information. is executed. The task content information includes the types of image data required to display an image of one frame at the corresponding update timing, and information required to derive various parameters to be applied to the image data. ing.

As described above, images are updated in all of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 at each update timing. is the type of image data necessary to display one frame of image at the corresponding update timing for all of the main display device 41, first sub-display device 43 and second sub-display device 44, and the image data Necessary information for deriving various parameters applied to is set. FIG. 36(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of background image data set in the content of one task in a predetermined execution object table for display control.

The information about the content of the task is not set with each image data as it is, but is set with address ID information corresponding to each image data as information about the type of image data. The information of this address ID is set as the address information of the drawing list. Also, a combination of display target data, display order data, and other information is set for each type of image data. Other information is information used to derive various parameters to be applied to each image data.

The display target data and the display order data are information used to derive the display order priority data in the drawing list. More specifically, the display target data is data for specifying which of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is the display device to be displayed by the effect CPU 82. be. Specifically, the display target data "0" corresponds to the main display device 41, the display target data "1" corresponds to the first sub-display device 43, and the display target data "2". corresponds to the second sub-display device 44 . The display order data is data for specifying the drawing order in each of the display devices 41, 43 and 44 to be displayed by the effect CPU 82. FIG. In each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, the display order data "0" indicates that the image data corresponds to the image displayed so as to exist on the farthest side, and the display order data "1" indicates It indicates that the image data corresponds to the image displayed as if it exists in front of it, and the display order data "2" corresponds to the image that is displayed as if it exists in front of it. Indicates image data.

The presentation CPU 82 sets the display order data as it is as the display order priority data in the drawing list for the image data whose display object data is "0". Thus, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as "0", "1" and "2" are set as display order priority data for the first to third main background image data. For image data whose display object data is "1", the rendering CPU 82 adds "100", which is the first display object reference value, to the value of the display order data as display order priority data in the drawing list. set. Thus, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as "100", "101" and "102" are set as display order priority data for the first to third background image data for the first sub. For image data whose display object data is "2", the rendering CPU 82 adds "200", which is the second display object reference value, to the value of the display order data as display order priority data in the drawing list. set. Thus, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as "200", "201" and "202" are set as the display order priority data corresponding to the first to third background image data for the second sub.

As described above, the task content information includes display target data specifying the types of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be rendered, and display data specifying the rendering order of the image data in each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. sequential data is set. As a result, in the process of creating an execution target table for display control in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the designer can determine the types of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be displayed and the image data for each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. It is sufficient to set each piece of information that has been grasped while grasping the drawing order of , and there is no need to grasp the offset value corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 in the display order priority data of the drawing list. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated, and the efficiency of the design work can be improved accordingly.

In addition, even if the display target data and the display order data are set at the design stage instead of setting the display order priority data, the display device 41, 43 and 44 are distinguished by using the display order priority data. This eliminates the need to set dedicated data indicating which display device 41, 43, 44 the image data corresponds to in the drawing list, thereby simplifying the data structure of the drawing list. Become.

The processing contents for setting the display order priority data of the drawing list using the display target data and the display order data will be described below. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing drawing list creation processing executed by the performance CPU 82 . The drawing list creation process is executed when one drawing list is created in each of steps S909, S911, S915, and S917 in the drawing list output process (FIG. 27).

First, processing for updating the write target pointer in the drawing list to be created this time is executed (step S1301). The write target pointer is information referred to by the effect CPU 82 to specify an area for setting the display order priority data, the parameter information and the address information in the drawing list to be created this time. When starting to create a new drawing list, the write target pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the first area in the drawing list, and after that, the process of step S1301 is executed. The value of the write target pointer is incremented by 1 every time it is written.

After that, among the image data to be set in the drawing list this time, the image data for which the display target data set in the contents of the current task in the execution target table for display control is "0" exists (step S1302). Specifically, if the 2D drawing list is to be created, the display target data is "0" in the various image data identified in step S907 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27). It is determined whether or not there is image data that is If the 3D drawing list is to be created, the display target data is "0" in the various image data identified in step S913 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27). Determine whether image data exists. These processing contents are the same in step S1304, which will be described later.

If there is image data whose display target data is "0" (step S1302: YES), display order data corresponding to that image data is set as display order priority data (step S1303). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is "0", the image data is displayed in the display order set in the contents of the current task in the execution target table for display control. Data is set as display order priority data for the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. If there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is "0", the image data with the smallest display order data is selected from among the image data, and the The display order data to be displayed is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

If there is no image data whose display target data is "0" (step S1302: NO), the execution target table for display control does not exist in the image data set for the current drawing list. It is determined whether or not there is image data for which the display target data set in the content of the current task is "1" (step S1304). If there is image data whose display target data is "1" (step S1304: YES), the first display target reference value "100" is applied to the display order data corresponding to the image data. The added value is set as display order priority data (step S1305). Specifically, if there is only one piece of image data whose display target data is "1", the image data is displayed in the display order set in the current task content in the execution target table for display control. A value obtained by adding "100", which is the first display target reference value, to the data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. If there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is "1", the image data having the minimum display order data is selected from among the image data, and the image data corresponding to that image data is selected. A value obtained by adding "100", which is the first display target reference value, to the display order data to be displayed is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

If there is no image data whose display target data is "1" (step S1304: NO), it means that there is only image data whose display target data is "2". In this case, a value obtained by adding "200", which is the second display target reference value, to the display order data corresponding to the image data is set as display order priority data (step S1306). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is "2", the display order set in the contents of the current task in the execution target table for display control is applied to that image data. A value obtained by adding "200", which is the second display object reference value, to the data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write object pointer. Also, if there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is "2", the image data with the minimum display order data is selected from among the image data, and the A value obtained by adding "200", which is the second display target reference value, to the display order data to be displayed is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

According to the above processing, the display order priority data corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 are generated in a certain manner using the display target data and the display order data set in the contents of the task. It can be set in the drawing list. In addition, since the image data to be displayed is set in the drawing list in order from the image data with the smallest value, the drawing list can be set in the order of main display device 41→first sub-display device 43→second sub-display device 44. becomes possible.

In the drawing list creation process, if any one of steps S1303, S1305, and S1306 is executed, parameter information setting processing is executed (step S1307), and address information setting processing is executed (step S1308). ). In the parameter information setting process, the parameter information derived in the previous task process for display control (step S506) for the image data for which the current display order priority data is set is assigned to the current write target pointer. Set as area parameter information. In the address information setting process, the address ID set in the contents of the current task in the execution target table for display control is set to the current write target pointer for the image data for which the current display order priority data is set. It is set as the address information of the area corresponding to .

After that, it is determined whether or not there is other image data to be written (step S1309). Specifically, if a 2D drawing list is to be created, the various image data specified in step S907 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) are used to create the current one 2D drawing list. It is determined whether or not there is image data that is not subject to the execution of steps S1302 to S1308 among the various image data that are subject to setting. Also, if a 3D drawing list is to be created, the various image data identified in step S913 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) are set in the current one 3D drawing list. It is determined whether or not there is image data that is not subject to the execution of steps S1302 to S1308 among the target image data. If there is image data that is not to be executed (step S1309: YES), after updating the write target pointer (step S1301), the image data that is not to be executed is processed in step S1302. to execute the processing of step S1308. As a result, the combination of the display order priority data, the parameter information, and the address information for the current single drawing list is set for all the image data to be set for the current single drawing list. .

<Effect of Configuration for Displaying Images on Multiple Display Devices 41, 43, and 44>
In a configuration in which a main display device 41, a first sub-display device 43, and a second sub-display device 44 are provided, information for displaying images on the plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44 is represented by one drawing list ( Hereinafter, the drawing list is also referred to as an aggregated drawing list) and provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 . This makes it possible to reduce the number of drawing lists provided from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 compared to a configuration in which the presentation lists are individually provided for each of the plurality of display devices 41 , 43 and 44 .

Information for displaying images on the respective display devices 41, 43, and 44 at the same update timing is aggregated and set in the aggregate drawing list. In this case, the rendering LSI 85 may treat all the information set in the consolidated drawing list as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and the display may correspond to any update timing among a plurality of different update timings. There is no need to execute processing for determining whether it is information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the process executed using the aggregate drawing list in the effect LSI 85 .

Using the display order priority data for specifying the setting order of the image data in the frame areas 114, 115, 117, and 118 in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, the image data designated as the object to be used corresponds to which display device 41, 43, 44 is specified. This eliminates the need to set dedicated information for designating the types of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set in the consolidated drawing list, thereby reducing the number of types of information set in the consolidated drawing list. becomes possible.

For the image data corresponding to the main display device 41, a value less than the first display target reference value is set as display order priority data, and for the image data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43, the first display target reference value is set as display order priority data. A value greater than or equal to the second display target reference value and less than the second display target reference value is set, and a value equal to or higher than the second display target reference value is set as display order priority data for the image data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 . As a result, in the configuration for designating the type of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set using the display order priority data, the image data designated as the use target is displayed on any of the display devices 41, 43, 44. The correspondence is clearly distinguished in the display order priority data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for identifying the types of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. FIG.

In the configuration where the effect CPU 82 creates a drawing list based on the information set in the execution object table for display control, the display order priority data is not set as it is in the execution object table for display control. , display target data corresponding to the types of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set, and frame regions 114, 115, 117, 118 is set, and the display order priority data is derived using the display target data and the display order data. As a result, when setting the execution target table for display control in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the types of the display devices 41, 43 and 44 to be set and the plurality of display devices to be used in the display devices 41, 43 and 44 are set. It is only necessary to set the setting order in the type of image data, and there is no need to set the final display order priority data. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated.

As for the image data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43, the value obtained by adding the first display target reference value to the display order data is derived as the display order priority data, and the image data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 is derived. As for the data, the value obtained by adding the second display target reference value to the display order data is derived as the display order priority data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the display order priority data.

<Configuration for display output to each sub display device 43, 44>
Next, a configuration for outputting image signals to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 will be described.

As already described, the effect LSI 85 is provided with the second display circuit 99 as a circuit for outputting an image signal to each of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 . FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for outputting image signals to the sub display devices 43 and 44. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 38, the second display circuit 99 is provided with a first output section 131 and a second output section 132 . An image signal is output from the first output section 131 to the first sub-display device 43 , and an image signal is output from the second output section 132 to the second sub-display device 44 . When outputting these image signals, the frame areas 117, 117, 117, 117, 117, 117, 117, 117, 117, 117, 117, 117, 117, 117, 118, 117, and 118B of the sub first frame area 117 and the sub second frame area 118 provided in the register 93 of the production LSI 85 are selected. The drawing data created in 118 is referenced. In this case, only one sub-first frame region 117 and one sub-second frame region 118 are provided, and since the double-buffer system is adopted as already described, the sub-first frame region 117 and the sub second frame area 118, the drawing signal is output to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 based on the drawing data created in one of the frame areas. Rendering data for displaying an image in is created. That is, one frame of image is displayed on the first sub-display device 43 and one frame of the image is displayed on the second sub-display device 44 by one piece of drawing data created in one frame area 117, 118. is displayed.

FIG. 39 shows how one piece of drawing data is created in order to display one frame of image on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and how each sub-display device 43 uses the one piece of drawing data. , and 44, respectively. FIG. In FIG. 39, only one piece of image data is used to display one frame of image on the first sub-display device 43, and only one image data is used to display one frame of image on the second sub-display device 44. A case where only one image data is used for each sub-display device 43, 44 is described, but the same applies to a case where a plurality of image data are used for displaying one frame of image on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. .

The data shown in FIG. 39(a) is data simply showing the image data 133 for displaying one frame of image on the first sub-display device 43, and the data shown in FIG. 39(b) is the second data. This data simply shows the image data 134 for displaying the image for one frame on the sub-display device 44 . These image data 133 and 134 are pre-stored in the memory module 83 as already described, and when stored in the memory module 83, these image data 133 and 134 exist as individual data. These image data 133 and 134 are image data for 2D images, and are set as rectangular data in which a plurality of pixels exist in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. In the following description, the image data 133 will be referred to as the first sub image data 133 and the image data 134 will be referred to as the second sub image data 134 .

FIG. 39(c) is a diagram schematically showing one frame area 117, 118 in which one piece of drawing data for displaying one frame of image on each of the sub display devices 43, 44 is created. be. Each of the frame regions 117 and 118 is set as a rectangular data area in which a plurality of dots are present in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. In this case, the number of dots in the vertical direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to the number of dots in the vertical direction of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at their initial positions. there is Specifically, the number of dots in the vertical direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 is a predetermined number of dots in the vertical direction of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at their initial positions. It matches the value obtained by accumulating the number (specifically, "1"). Note that the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are display devices with the same number of dots, and both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the initial positions. , the number of dots in the vertical direction of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is the same, and the number of dots in the horizontal direction of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is also the same.

On the other hand, the number of dots in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 is the same as the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device when the respective sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. It corresponds to the sum of 44 dots in the horizontal direction. Specifically, the number of dots in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 is the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the first sub-display device 43 and the number of dots in the second sub-display device 43 when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. It matches the sum of the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the sub-display device 44 and the above predetermined number (specifically, "1").

By setting the number of dots in the frame areas 117 and 118 as described above, drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the first sub-display device 43 and image data for one frame on the second sub-display device 44 are displayed. It is possible to create both drawing data for displaying an image in one frame area 117 , 118 .

In detail, the first sub-image data 133 and the second sub-image data 134 are set in the frame areas 117 and 118. As already described, the first sub-image data 133 has a plurality of dots vertically and horizontally. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39(a), the first sub-image data 133 has a plurality of vertical lines formed of a plurality of vertically aligned dots arranged horizontally. Similarly, since the second sub-image data 134 also has a plurality of dots vertically and horizontally as already described, the second sub-image data 134 is arranged vertically as shown in FIG. 39(b). A plurality of vertical lines made up of a plurality of dots are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 39(c), since the frame areas 117 and 118 have a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions as described above, a vertical line made up of a plurality of dots arranged in the vertical direction is formed in the horizontal direction. are installed in parallel.

In this configuration, the data of each vertical line of the first sub-image data 133 is set so as to be distributed to the vertical lines set in odd-numbered horizontal lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 . In this case, each vertical line data in the first sub-image data 133 is arranged in each horizontal odd-numbered frame area 117, 118 while maintaining the horizontal arrangement order in the first sub-image data 133. set to a vertical line. Further, the data of each vertical line of the second sub image data 134 is set so as to be distributed to the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 . In this case, the data of each vertical line in the second sub-image data 134 is arranged in each of the even-numbered horizontal lines in the frame regions 117 and 118 while maintaining the horizontal arrangement order of the second sub-image data 134 . set to a vertical line.

The image signals corresponding to the data set in the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118 are output to the corresponding dots in the first sub-display device 43 by the first output section 131 of the second display circuit 99. be. Further, the image signals corresponding to the data set in the even-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118 are output by the second output section 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the corresponding dots on the second sub-display device 44 respectively. output to As a result, the data corresponding to the image signal output to the first sub-display device 43 becomes the data shown in FIG. 39D, and the data corresponding to the image signal output to the second sub-display device 44 becomes The data is as shown in 39(e).

The output of the image signal to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 in the second display circuit 99 is synchronized with the clock signal input to the second display circuit 99 from the clock circuit provided in the production LSI 85. It is done by letting Specifically, the second display circuit 99 displays an image corresponding to one dot present in the horizontal odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118 for one pulse signal received as a clock signal. A signal is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to one dot arranged side by side in a predetermined horizontal direction with respect to the one dot is output to the second sub-display device 44. FIG. More specifically, at the output timing of the first image signal for the drawing data created in the frame areas 117 and 118, the image signal corresponding to one dot existing in the upper left corner of the frame areas 117 and 118 in FIG. is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to one dot arranged in parallel to the right side of the one dot is output to the second sub-display device 44. FIG. At the output timing of the next image signal, it corresponds to the odd-numbered dot in the horizontal direction among the two dots arranged side by side to the right of the two dots that were the object of output of the image signal at the first output timing. An image signal is output to the first sub-display device 43 and an image signal corresponding to even-numbered dots is output to the second sub-display device 44 . After that, after the output of the image signal for one horizontal line is completed, the image signal is output for each two dots in order from the left side for one horizontal line one step below.

How the image signal is output to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 will be described while showing the relationship with the timing at which the image signal is output from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 . FIG. 40 is a time chart showing how image signals are output to the respective display devices 41, 43 and 44, and FIG. 40(b) shows the period during which the image signal is output from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41, and FIG. 40(c) shows the second display circuit 99. 40(d) shows a period during which the image signal is output from the second display circuit 99 to the second sub-display device 44. FIG.

At the timing of t1, output of a pulse signal as a clock signal to the first display circuit 98 and the second display circuit 99 is started as shown in FIG. 40(a). In this case, at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the first display circuit 98 starts outputting an image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 to the main display device 41. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 40(c), output of an image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the first output section 131 of the second display circuit 99 to the first sub-display device 43 is started. be.

After that, at the timing t2 in which the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is continued, as shown in FIG. Thus, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the first output section 131 of the second display circuit 99 to the first sub-display device 43 ends. At the timing t2, an image corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 is transmitted from the second output section 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the second sub-display device 44 as shown in FIG. 40(d). Signal output begins.

After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the signal for one pulse in the clock signal is terminated as shown in FIG. 40(a). In this case, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is completed. 40(d), the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the second output section 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the second sub-display device 44 is completed.

After that, the signal outputs similar to those at timings t1 to t3 are repeated at timings t4 to t6, timings t7 to t9, and timings t10 to t12, respectively. By outputting each image signal in synchronization with the output of the pulse signal in the clock signal as described above, the main display is performed using one piece of drawing data created in one frame region 114, 115. While the image for one frame is updated in the device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are displayed using one piece of drawing data created in one frame area 117, 118. , the image for one frame is updated.

When one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponds to one dot of the main display device 41, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame regions 114 and 115 for one dot of the main display device 41 is This is performed during the output period of one pulse of the clock signal, and when one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponds to a plurality of dots of the main display device 41, the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponding to a plurality of dots of the main display device 41 are displayed. An image signal corresponding to one dot is output during the output period of one pulse of the clock signal. Also, when one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to one dot in the first sub-display device 43, an image corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 for one dot in the first sub-display device 43 is displayed. When the signal is output during the half output period of one pulse of the clock signal and one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to a plurality of dots on the first sub-display device 43, the first sub-display device 43 The output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 with respect to the plurality of dots is performed in the half output period of one pulse of the clock signal. Further, when one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to one dot in the second sub-display device 44, an image corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 for one dot in the second sub-display device 44 is displayed. When the signal is output during the half output period of one pulse of the clock signal and one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to a plurality of dots in the second sub-display device 44, the second sub-display device 44 The output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 with respect to the plurality of dots is performed in the half output period of one pulse of the clock signal.

As described above, drawing data for displaying a one-frame image on the first sub-display device 43 and drawing data for displaying a one-frame image on the second sub-display device 44 form one frame area. 117 and 118, the number of frame areas 117 and 118 is reduced compared to the configuration in which the drawing data corresponding to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are created in separate frame areas. can be suppressed.

In response to the input of one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43, and another one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output. An image signal is output to the second sub-display device 44 . As a result, the timing of completing the update of one frame of the image on the first sub-display device 43 and the timing of completing the updating of one frame of the image on the second sub-display device 44 can be substantially the same timing. becomes possible. Therefore, the timing of completing one frame of image update for one of the first sub-display device 43 and second sub-display device 44 is greater than the timing of completing one frame of image updating for the other. It is possible to prevent deviation.

Drawing data for displaying an image of one frame on the first sub-display device 43 is set to the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118, and an image of one frame is displayed on the second sub-display device 44. Rendering data for display is set to even-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 . As a result, when image signals are output from the frame areas 117 and 118 to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43. , and the image signal adjacent to that one dot is output to the second sub-display device 44, simplifying the processing configuration for specifying the type of dot to be the output target of the image signal. It becomes possible to

A processing configuration that enables output of the image signal as described above will be described below. First, the writing process executed by the 2D control unit 96 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the writing process is executed in step S705 in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19).

In the writing process, the display order priority data set in the drawing list for the image data to be written this time is specified, and the value of the specified display order priority data is the first display target reference value of "100". ” (step S1401). If the value of the display order priority data is less than the first display target reference value of "100" (step S1401: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the main display device 41. Since this means that the image data is to be created, processing is executed to draw the image data to be written this time in the 2D drawing area 112 in the main display drawing area 111 of the register 93 ( step S1402). As already described, the 2D drawing area 112 is an area for creating drawing data for a 2D image among the drawing data for displaying an image of one frame on the main display device 41 .

On the other hand, if the value of the display order priority data is equal to or greater than the first display target reference value of "100" (step S1401: NO), the image data to be written this time is one of the sub display devices 43, 44, the drawing process is executed to the sub-display drawing area 116 in the register 93 (step S1403). FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the drawing process.

First, the display order priority data set in the drawing list is specified for the image data to be written this time. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1501). If the value of the display order priority data is less than the second display target reference value of "200" (step S1501: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43. It means that it is image data for creating . In this case, first, the processing for setting the number of times of drawing provided in the register 93 is executed (step S1502). The number-of-drawing counter is a counter for the 2D control unit 96 to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction when the vertical line is regarded as one unit for the current image data. In step S1502, based on the parameter of the rotation angle set for the image data to be written this time, the direction in which the image data is drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 is specified, and the vertical line is drawn in that direction. The number of is derived by calculation. Then, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines derived by the calculation is set in the number-of-drawing counter.

After that, in the image data to be written this time, the data of the vertical line corresponding to the current drawing counter value is extracted (step S1503). In addition, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the parameters of the coordinates set for the image data to be written this time and the number of times of drawing counter are set. A vertical line corresponding to the current value is specified, and the data of the vertical line extracted in step S1503 is drawn on the specified vertical line of the frame regions 117 and 118 (step S1504). In this case, depending on the content of the coordinate parameter, even the data of the vertical line corresponding to the leftmost position in the image data to be written this time exists in the middle position in the horizontal direction of the frame areas 117 and 118. It may also be drawn on a vertical line that

After that, 1 is subtracted from the drawing number counter (step S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-drawing counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1506). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processing of steps S1503 and S1504 is executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. By repeating the processing in steps S1503 and S1504, the drawing of the image data to be written this time in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

If the value of the display order priority data is equal to or greater than the second display target reference value of "200" (step S1501: YES), the image data to be written this time is drawing data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44. It means that it is image data for creating . In this case, similarly to step S1502, setting processing is executed for the number of drawing times counter provided in the register 93 (step S1507). Specifically, based on the parameter of the rotation angle set for the image data to be written this time, the direction in which the image data is drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 is specified, and in that direction The number of vertical lines is derived by calculation. Then, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines derived by the calculation is set in the number-of-drawing counter.

After that, in the image data to be written this time, the data of the vertical line corresponding to the current drawing counter value is extracted (step S1508). In addition, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the parameter of the coordinates set for the image data to be written this time and the number of times of drawing counter are set. A vertical line corresponding to the current value is specified, and the vertical line data extracted in step S1508 is drawn on the specified vertical line of the frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1509). In this case, depending on the content of the coordinate parameter, even the data of the vertical line corresponding to the leftmost position in the image data to be written this time exists in the middle position in the horizontal direction of the frame areas 117 and 118. It may also be drawn on a vertical line that

After that, 1 is subtracted from the drawing number counter (step S1510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1511). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processing of steps S1508 and S1509 is executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. By repeating the processing in steps S1508 and S1509, the drawing of the image data to be written this time in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

Next, the signal output processing executed by the second display circuit 99 of the performance LSI 85 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Although the second display circuit 99 is provided as a dedicated circuit in which a circuit for executing signal output processing is preset, the present invention is not limited to this, and the program stored in the memory module 83 or the like and the A configuration provided as a general-purpose circuit that executes signal output processing using data may be employed. The same applies to the first display circuit 98 as well.

When the output of the pulse signal from the clock circuit is started, it is the signal output timing (step S1601: YES). When the signal output timing comes, the abscissa is updated (step S1602). In the abscissa update process, if the current process is the first image signal output process for the drawing data that is the output target of the current image signal, the dot at the upper left corner in the frame areas 117 and 118 is the image. Coordinate information is set so as to be the dot that is the object of signal output. On the other hand, if the current processing is not the first image signal output processing, the abscissa information among the current coordinate information is updated so as to shift one dot to the right. In this case, the ordinate information among the coordinate information is maintained as it is.

If the information on the abscissa exceeds the maximum value of the abscissa (step S1603: YES) as a result of updating the information on the abscissa to the right dot by one dot, the information on the abscissa is the frame area. The information of the abscissa is cleared to "0" so that the information corresponds to the leftmost dot in 117, 118 (step S1604). Further, the information on the ordinate is updated so that the information on the ordinate corresponds to the dot one step below the dot on the current ordinate in the frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1605).

After that, the image signal set to the dot of the coordinate information updated this time is output from the first output unit 131 to the corresponding dot of the first sub-display device 43 (step S1606). The output period of this image signal is less than or equal to half the output period of the pulse signal in the clock signal. When the output of the image signal is completed (step S1607: YES), update processing of the abscissa is executed (step S1608). In the abscissa update process, the abscissa information among the current coordinate information is updated so as to be shifted to the right dot by one dot. In this case, the ordinate information among the coordinate information is maintained as it is. After that, the image signal set to the dot of the coordinate information updated this time is output from the second output unit 132 to the corresponding dot of the second sub-display device 44 (step S1609). The output period of this image signal is less than or equal to half the output period of the pulse signal in the clock signal. If the output of the image signal has been completed (step S1610: YES), the current processing round of the signal output processing ends.

By executing the signal output processing as described above, each time one pulse signal is input as a clock signal to the second display circuit 99 as shown in the time chart of FIG. An image signal is output to the first sub-display device 43 and an image signal is output to the second sub-display device 44 .

Here, as already explained, the main display device 41 cannot be displaced, whereas the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided so as to be displaceable. Specifically, the first sub-display device 43 is basically arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. and the second side-by-side position as shown in FIG. 6B. The second sub-display device 44 is basically arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. It is arranged at positions for display effects such as the first side-by-side position and the second side-by-side position as shown in FIG. 6(b).

FIG. 44 shows an example of an execution object table for display control during a displacement effect period in which an effect of displacing the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is executed. In the displacement rendering period shown in FIG. 44, first, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 43 are arranged in the initial position. Images are displayed on each of the two sub display devices 44 . In this case, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 display an image corresponding to being arranged at the initial position.

After that, in a situation where the second sub-display device 44 is held at the initial position and the first sub-display device 43 is displaced or arranged at a position for display effects, the main display device 41 and the first sub-display device 43 are displayed. Images are displayed on each of the display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 . In this case, the first sub-display device 43 displays an image for display effects, while the second sub-display device 44 displays an image corresponding to being arranged at the initial position.

After that, the main display device 41 and the first sub-display device 43 are arranged in the initial position and the second sub-display device 44 is displaced or arranged in a position for display effects. Images are displayed on each of the display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 . In this case, the first sub-display device 43 displays an image corresponding to being arranged at the initial position, while the second sub-display device 44 displays an image for display effects.

After that, in a situation where both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are displaced or arranged in positions for display effect, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 43 are displayed. Images are displayed on each of the two sub display devices 44 . In this case, images for display effects are displayed on both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 .

In the configuration in which the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are displaceably provided as described above, even if the respective sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at any position, In the frame areas 117 and 118 of the drawing area 116 for the sub-display in the register 93, the drawing data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 and the drawing data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 are displayed by the predetermined processing already explained at each update timing. Rendering data is aggregated and created. Also, using the drawing data created by consolidation, image signals are output to each of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 by the already-described predetermined processing. This eliminates the need to switch the processing configuration for creating drawing data and the processing configuration for outputting image signals according to the positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, thereby simplifying the processing configuration. It becomes possible.

<Effects of configuration regarding display output to sub-display devices 43 and 44>
Drawing data for displaying one frame of image on the first sub-display device 43 (hereinafter also referred to as first drawing data) and drawing data for displaying one frame of image on the second sub-display device 44 (hereinafter also referred to as first drawing data) hereinafter also referred to as second drawing data) are collectively created for one frame area 117, 118, so that the drawing data corresponding to each of the sub-display devices 43, 44 are stored in separate frame areas. It is possible to reduce the number of frame areas 117 and 118 compared to the created configuration. This makes it possible to display images on the plurality of sub-display devices 43 and 44 while simplifying the hardware configuration for accessing the frame areas 117 and 118 .

Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set in one frame area 117, 118 at the same time. This allows the period for creating the first drawing data and the period for creating the second drawing data to overlap.

Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be used at the same update timing are set in one frame area 117 or 118 . As a result, the first drawing data and the second drawing data set in one frame area 117, 118 do not need to be individually used at different update timings, so the processing load of the second display circuit 99 can be reduced. becomes possible.

Drawing data for displaying an image of one frame on the first sub-display device 43 is set to the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118, and an image of one frame is displayed on the second sub-display device 44. Rendering data for display is set to even-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 . As a result, when image signals are output from the frame areas 117 and 118 to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43. , and the image signal adjacent to that one dot is output to the second sub-display device 44, simplifying the processing configuration for specifying the type of dot to be the output target of the image signal. It becomes possible to

In response to the input of one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43, and another one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output. An image signal is output to the second sub-display device 44 . As a result, the timing of completing the update of one frame of the image on the first sub-display device 43 and the timing of completing the updating of one frame of the image on the second sub-display device 44 can be substantially the same timing. becomes possible. Therefore, the timing of completing one frame of image update for one of the first sub-display device 43 and second sub-display device 44 is greater than the timing of completing one frame of image updating for the other. It is possible to prevent deviation.

<Structure for displaying right-handed notification images 141 and 143>
Next, a configuration for displaying the hitting-to-right notification images 141 and 143 on the respective display devices 41, 43 and 44 will be described.

As already explained, in the game area PA, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area when the center frame 42 is used as a reference. Therefore, in order to generate a prize to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, it is necessary to perform a shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the right side area. In this case, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 display a right-handed notification image indicating that the shooting operation should be performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area of the game area PA. is displayed.

FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the right-handed hitting notification images 141 and 143 displayed on the display devices 41, 43 and 44, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), on the main display device 41, as the main-side right-handed hitting notification image 141, the main display device 41 extends horizontally in the middle of the vertical direction on the display surface of the main display device 41. A band-shaped image 141a is displayed as a result, and an instruction image 141b is displayed so as to be superimposed on the band-shaped image 141a from the front to instruct the player to hit to the right. The main side hitting right notification image 141 is continuously displayed in the opening/closing execution mode, and the display position and display mode on the main display device 41 are constant. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 46(a), the main-side hitting-to-right notification image 141 is displayed using the main-side hitting-to-right image data group 142 pre-stored in the memory module 83. FIG.

In the opening/closing execution mode, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 may be arranged at the first juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. In some cases, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the second juxtaposed position. When these sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first side-by-side position or the second side-by-side position, a part of the area where the main side hitting right notification image 141 is displayed on the main display device 41 is displayed. The sub-display devices 43 and 44 face each other from the front of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, the visibility of the right hitting notification image 141 on the main side is reduced by the sub display devices 43 and 44 . On the other hand, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at a position other than the initial position such as the first juxtaposed position or the second juxtaposed position in the opening/closing execution mode, the first sub-display device 43 and the second The sub-side hitting-to-the-right notification image 143 is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44 . In addition, when the first sub-display device 43 is arranged at the initial position in the opening/closing execution mode, the sub-side right-hand hitting notification image 143 is not displayed on the first sub-display device 43, and the opening/closing execution mode is performed. In the mode, when the second sub-display device 44 is arranged at the initial position, the sub-side hitting-to-the-right notification image 143 is not displayed on the second sub-display device 44 .

One sub-side hitting right notification image 143 is displayed on part of the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and one is also displayed on part of the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 . As shown in FIG. 46( a ), the memory module 83 pre-stores the sub-side hitting right image data 144 . The sub-side hitting right image data 144 is used in any case where the sub-side hitting to right notification image 143 is displayed on the second sub-display device 44 .

The position where the sub-side hitting-right notification image 143 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43 is the upper right corner portion in the state of FIG. The display position of the image 143 is fixed at the same position even if the first sub-display device 43 is displaced. In other words, the upper right corner portion of the first sub-display device 43 in the state of FIG. 45(a) becomes the lower right corner portion in the state of FIG. 45(b). Since the display position of the hitting-to-the-right notification image 143 on the side is fixed, the hitting-to-the-right notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed in the upper right corner of the first sub-display device 43 in the state of FIG. In addition, in the state of FIG. 45(b), it is displayed in the lower right corner of the first sub-display device 43. FIG.

Similarly, the position where the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the second sub-display device 44 is the lower left corner portion in the state of FIG. The display position of the right hitting notification image 143 is fixed at the same position even if the second sub-display device 44 is displaced. In other words, the lower left corner portion of the second sub-display device 44 in the state of FIG. 45(a) becomes the upper left corner portion in the state of FIG. 45(b). Since the display position of the hitting right notification image 143 is fixed, the hitting right notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed in the lower left corner of the second sub display device 44 in the state of FIG. In the state of FIG. 45(b), it is displayed in the upper left corner of the second sub-display device 44. FIG.

By fixing the display position of the sub-side hit-to-right notification image 143 on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 as described above, the display position of the sub-side hit-to-right notification image 143 on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is determined. There is no need to switch the information of the attached coordinates according to the displacement state of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 . As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for displaying the right hitting notification image 143 on the sub side.

When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first side-by-side position where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are vertically arranged side by side, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged on the upper side as shown in FIG. The sub-side hitting right notification image 143 is displayed on the upper part of the first sub-display device 43 that is placed on the lower side, and the sub-side hitting right notification image 143 is displayed on the lower part of the second sub-display device 44 that is arranged on the lower side. is displayed. When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the second side-by-side position where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged on the left side as shown in FIG. The sub-side hit-to-the-right notification image 143 is displayed on the upper part of the second sub-display device 44, and the sub-side hit-to-the-right notification image 143 is displayed on the lower part of the first sub-display device 43 arranged on the right side. Is displayed. In other words, regardless of whether the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged in the first side-by-side position or the second side-by-side position, the vertical direction of the display area caused by the side-by-side arrangement of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 A sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed at each position of . This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 in either of the first side-by-side position and the second side-by-side position.

Each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is driven and controlled so that the state of being arranged at the first juxtaposed position and the state of being arranged at the second juxtaposed position are alternately repeated in the open/close execution mode. As a result, the situation in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate clockwise and the situation in which the sub-display devices 44 rotate counterclockwise are alternately repeated. On the other hand, the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 makes it easy for the player to understand the content of the right-handed instruction regardless of the rotational positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44. It is an image.

FIGS. 46(b) and 46(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents displayed as the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side. As shown in FIGS. 46(b) and 46(c), the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side has an annular outer edge, and the continuous instruction image 143a is displayed in the width portion of the annular shape. . The continuous indication image 143a is composed of two character images "Right shot" and two arrow images, and the arrow images are present on both sides of the character images, and the character images are present on both sides of the arrow images. arranged in a circle. In this case, one character image and one character image are arranged to face each other across the center of the ring, and are arranged so that the upper side of each character image is on the outer peripheral side. As a result, even when the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is arranged at a rotational position in which one character image faces downward, the other character image is displayed upward. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the content of the character image regardless of the rotational position of the right-handed informing image 143 on the sub side.

In addition, while the display position of the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is fixed, the central portion of the circular ring in the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is the rotation center in a certain direction (specifically, to the right, clockwise). As a result, regardless of the positions at which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged, the timing at which the sub-side hitting right notification image 143 is displayed at the rotational position where the player can easily grasp the content of the character image is surely generated. It will be done.

In the configuration in which the sub-side hitting-to-the-right notification image 143 is displayed so as to rotate in a certain direction, the rotation speed is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44 . How the rotational speed of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 is changed according to the displacement state of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 47(a) shows a period in which hitting to the right is announced on each of the display devices 41, 43 and 44, and FIG. FIG. 47(c) shows a period during which the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, and FIG. It indicates the period of rotation in the counterclockwise direction.

At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 47(a), it is the timing to start the notification of hitting to the right. In this case, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. The display of the right hitting notification image 143 on the sub side on the display devices 43 and 44 is started.

Here, the right hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed so as to rotate in the clockwise direction as already described, but the rotation speed is a first speed, a second speed faster than the first speed, There is a third speed that is higher than the second speed. The first speed, which is the lowest speed, is the speed set when the unit of each of the sub-display devices 43, 44 rotates clockwise, and the second speed, which is the intermediate speed, is the speed of each of the sub-display devices 43, 44. The third speed, which is the highest speed, is the speed set when the integral objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate counterclockwise. is.

When the integrated object of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the clockwise direction, the clockwise rotation speed of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 is set to the lowest first speed, so that the sub-side When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotated in the same direction as the rotation direction of the right-handed informing image 143, the rotation speed of the right-handed informing image 143 on the sub side can be made relatively low. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation of the right hitting notification image 143 on the sub side from becoming faster than necessary.

By setting the rotation speed in the clockwise direction of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 to the highest third speed when the integrated object of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the sub-side When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotated in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the hitting-right notification image 143, the rotation speed of the hitting-right notification image 143 on the sub side can be relatively increased. becomes. The rotation speed of the right-handed informing image 143 on the sub side is faster than the rotation speed when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 integrally rotate in the opposite direction. As a result, even when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 integrally rotate in the opposite direction, the player continues to recognize that the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub-side rotates clockwise. It is possible to

At timing t1, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are not rotating as shown in FIG. 47(d). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 is set to the second speed.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the sub-display devices 43 and 44 integrally start rotating clockwise. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotational speed of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 is changed from the second speed to the first speed. This makes it possible to reduce the rotation speed of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 in accordance with the start of clockwise rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 .

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the sub-side hitting to right notification image 143 returns from the first speed to the second speed.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the sub-display devices 43 and 44 integrally start rotating in the counterclockwise direction. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 is changed from the second speed to the third speed. This makes it possible to accelerate the rotational speed of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 in accordance with the start of counterclockwise rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 .

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the integral rotation of the respective sub-display devices 43 and 44 is stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the sub-side hitting to right notification image 143 returns from the first speed to the second speed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(a), at the timing of t6, it is the timing to end the notification of hitting to the right. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the display of the main side hitting right notification image 141 on the main display device 41 ends, and as shown in FIG. The display of the right hitting notification image 143 on the sub side ends.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the display of the hitting-to-the-right notification image 143 on the sub side as described above will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing a setting process for notification of hitting to the right executed by the performance CPU 82 . Note that the setting process for right-handed notification is executed in the task process for display control in step S506 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

If it is time to start hitting to the right notification (step S1701: NO, step S1702: YES), processing for starting display of the hitting to the right notification image 141 on the main side is executed (step S1703). In this process, the main right hitting image data group 142 is displayed so that the main right hitting notification image 141 as shown in FIGS. is set to be the object of rendering processing, and parameter information to be applied this time to the right-handed image data group 142 on the main side is derived.

Thereafter, a process for setting coordinate information for the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 is executed (step S1704). In this process, the sub-side hitting right notification image 143 is displayed in a predetermined corner portion of the first sub-display device 43, and the sub-side hitting notification image 143 is displayed in a predetermined corner portion of the second sub-display device 44. Two pieces of fixed coordinate information corresponding to each of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are derived so that the right hitting notification image 143 is displayed. Further, in this processing, a use instruction is set for one sub-side right-handed hitting image data 144 in order to display the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 43 In order to display the sub-side hitting right notification image 143 on the device 44, a use instruction is set for one piece of sub-side hitting right image data 144. FIG. In step S1705, parameter information other than the coordinate information applied to the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub-display device 43 is derived, and used for the second sub-display device 44. Parameter information other than the coordinate information to be applied to the right-handed image data 144 on the secondary side is derived.

Drawing data is created in accordance with the drawing list in which the information derived in steps S1703 to S1705 is set, and an image signal is output in accordance with the drawing data. When the image 141 starts to be displayed, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 start to display the sub-side hitting-to-the-right notification image 143 .

If it is the execution period of the hitting to the right notification (step S1701: YES), update processing of the hitting to the right notification image 141 on the main side is executed (step S1706). In this process, parameter information is derived for displaying the main side hitting-to-right notification image 141 in the mode of update timing corresponding to the current update instruction. By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the parameter information is set, the display content of the main side hitting right notification image 141 on the main display device 41 is updated.

Thereafter, as in step S1704, processing for setting coordinate information for the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 is executed (step S1707). In this process, the same coordinate information derived in step S1704 is used for the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub-display device 43 and for the second sub-display device 44. Each of the right shot image data 144 on the sub side is derived. As a result, the display position of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 on the first sub-display device 43 is fixed, and the display position of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 on the second sub-display device 44 is also fixed.

After that, if it is not the period of rotation of the unit of the sub display devices 43 and 44 (step S1708: NO), the rotation speed of the sub-side hitting right notification image 143 displayed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is the second speed. The sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub-display device 43 and the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44 It is derived as rotation information applied to each of the data 144 (step S1709). By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 seems to be rotating at the rotation speed of the second speed. to be displayed.

If it is the rotation period of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 and the direction of rotation is clockwise (step S1708 and step S1709: YES), the first update process of the rotation information during rotation is executed (step S1711). In the first update process, rotation information for setting the rotation speed of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 displayed on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 to the first speed is displayed on the first sub-display device 43. and the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44, respectively. By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 seems to be rotating at the rotation speed of the first speed. to be displayed.

If it is during the rotation period of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 and the direction of rotation is counterclockwise (step S1708: YES, step S1710: NO), the second update process of rotation information during rotation is executed. (step S1712). In the second update process, rotation information for setting the rotation speed of the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 displayed on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 to the third speed is set to the first sub-display device 43. and the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44, respectively. By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, the sub-side hitting right notification image 143 on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 seems to be rotating at the rotation speed of the third speed. to be displayed.

If any one of steps S1709, S1711 and S1712 has been executed, another parameter setting process is executed (step S1713). In this process, parameter information other than coordinate information and rotation information applied to the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub-display device 43 is derived, and for the second sub-display device 44 Parameter information other than coordinate information and rotation information to be applied to the sub-side right-handed image data 144 to be used is derived.

<Effect of Configuration for Displaying Right Strike Notification Images 141 and 143>
A rotation operation is performed on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 . As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and to improve the interest in the game. In this case, in the right hitting notification image 143 on the sub side, the continuous indication image 143a is arranged in a ring. As a result, even when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the player can recognize the content of the notifying continuous instruction image 143a.

On the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the sub-side hitting-to-the-right notification image 143 is displayed as if it is rotating. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the sub-side hitting right notification image 143 in a predetermined display orientation regardless of the rotational positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 .

Since the rotation speed of the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is changed according to the operation mode of the rotation operation on the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the operation mode of the rotation operation on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 does not matter which mode. Even so, it is possible to make the display content of the right hitting notification image 143 on the sub side easy for the player to recognize.

<Configuration for Displaying Rotation Period Image 153>
Next, a configuration for displaying the rotation period image 153 on each of the display devices 41, 43 and 44 will be described.

The sub-display devices 43 and 44 are displaceable as already explained, and the first side-by-side position where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. It is rotatable between a second side-by-side position arranged side by side. In this case, when each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotates from the first side-by-side position to the second side-by-side position, each of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 A rotation period image 153 is displayed so as to make it difficult for the player to understand that the integrated objects of the respective sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

FIGS. 49(a) to 49(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the effect using the rotation period image 153. FIG. In the situation where both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the initial position, the movement start timing to the side-by-side position becomes the timing shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B. Movement of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 toward the first side-by-side position is started as shown. During this movement period, images that are continuous with the main display device 41 are not displayed on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, respectively. 43 and the second sub-display device 44 respectively display corresponding moving period images 151 . In this way, by displaying the moving period images 151 individually corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 moves from the initial position toward the first side-by-side position. The player can clearly grasp what is being done. The drive control for displacing the respective sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed by the distribution side MPU 73 as already explained.

After that, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first side-by-side position at the same time so that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged vertically as shown in FIG. 49(b). A series of display surfaces are formed by The state in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first side-by-side position is maintained over the side-by-side display period. During this juxtaposition display period, juxtaposition period images 152 such as predetermined character images are displayed on a series of display surfaces formed by the respective sub-display devices 43 and 44 . The juxtaposition period image 152 is displayed across both sub-display devices 43 and 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 . Note that in a region of the main display device 41 that is not opposed to the sub-display devices 43 and 44, a side-by-side setting period image 152 different from the side-by-side setting period image 152 displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is displayed. be done.

After that, when the side-by-side display period elapses, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate clockwise while maintaining a state in which a series of display surfaces are formed. placed in position. During this rotation period, the rotation period image 153 is displayed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 as shown in FIGS. 49(c) and 49(d). be. The rotation period image 153 is displayed across both the main display device 41 and the first sub-display device 43 so as to straddle the boundary between the main display device 41 and the first sub-display device 43. The image is displayed across both the main display device 41 and the second sub-display device 44 across the boundary between the display device 41 and the second sub-display device 44 . Further, the rotation period image 153 is displayed across both the sub-display devices 43 and 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 . In addition, the display mode of the rotation period image 153 displayed across the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 is the same as the rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. The display mode is such that it is independent of the position. Specifically, the outer edge portion of the integrated body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 that creates a boundary with the predetermined area of the main display device 41 changes as the integrated body rotates. The display content of the image portion displayed over both the predetermined area and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 at the timing is displayed on both the predetermined area and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 at the previous timing during the rotation period. The rotation period image 153 is displayed so that the display content has continuity with the image portion that was displayed over the period. As a result, one display surface is formed by the display surfaces of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 and the areas of the main display device 41 that do not face the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and the one display surface is fixed. A rotation period image 153 is displayed on the one display surface so that the player recognizes that it is the one surface. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

After that, when the rotation period elapses, it becomes a separation period in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are separated in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 49(e). During the separation period, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 do not display an image that is continuous with the main display device 41, and the main display device 41 and the first sub-display device 43 are not displayed. , and the second sub-display device 44, the corresponding separation period image 154 is displayed. By displaying the separation period image 154 individually corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 in this manner, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 move from the second side-by-side position toward the separation position. It becomes possible for the player to grasp that he or she is moving.

Here, as already explained, each display device 41 has a rotation period image 153 that makes it difficult for the player to grasp that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating during the rotation period. , 43 and 44 respectively. As a result, the player recognizes that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first side-by-side position even though the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are actually arranged at the second side-by-side position. situations can occur. If the sub-display devices 43 and 44 start to move toward the separation position in such a situation, the player is likely to find the action surprising. By providing such unexpectedness, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the image display.

A processing configuration for performing the image display as described above in each of the movement period, the side-by-side display period, the rotation period, and the separation period will be described below. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing setting processing of rotational movement display executed by the performance CPU 82 . Note that the rotational movement display setting processing is executed in the task processing for display control in step S506 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 14).

If it is the period of movement to the side-by-side position (step S1801: YES), use settings of various image data for displaying the image 151 for the movement period on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 are performed. Various parameter information to be applied to the image data is derived (steps S1802 to S1804). Rendering data is created according to the rendering list in which the information derived here is set, and an image signal is output according to the rendering data, whereby the movement period image 151 is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. be done.

If it is the side-by-side display period (step S1805: YES), use settings of various image data for displaying the side-by-side display period image 152 on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 are performed, and the various images are displayed. Various parameter information to be applied to the data is derived (steps S1806 to S1808). Rendering data is created according to the rendering list in which the information derived here is set, and image signals are output according to the rendering data, so that the side-by-side display period image 152 is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. is displayed.

If it is the rotation period (step S1809: YES), one display surface (hereinafter referred to as a (also referred to as an aggregated display surface) are set for use of various image data for displaying the rotation period image 153 over the entire surface, and various parameter information to be applied to the various image data are derived (step S1810 to step S1810). S1812). Rendering data is created according to the rendering list in which the information derived here is set, and an image signal is output according to the rendering data, whereby the rotation period image 153 is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. be done.

Here, a method of creating the image data 156 to 158 for displaying the rotation period image 153 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. When creating the image data 156 to 158, first, a plurality of 2D image data 155 are created for moving image display over the entire aggregate display surface during the rotation period. The plurality of 2D image data 155 are created in one-to-one correspondence with each update timing included in the rotation period. After that, from each of the 2D image data 155, image data 156 corresponding to the display range of the main display device 41, the display range of the first sub-display device 43, and the display range of the second sub-display device 44 at the corresponding update timing. Cut ~158.

The contents of the image data 156 to 158 for displaying the rotation period image 153 shown in FIG. 49(c) will be described. First, it is created (see FIG. 51(a)). When the data range corresponding to the display range by the main display device 41 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, the portions displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 become blank data as shown in FIG. 51(b). Image data 156 for displaying the rotation period image 153 is obtained for the portion. Data for setting blank color information such as black is set in the blank data. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 2D image data 155 may be used as it is as the image data 156 for the main display device 41 . In this case, even if a failure occurs in the drive mechanism of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 and at least one of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is not arranged in the juxtaposed position, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 The image that should be displayed originally is displayed on the main display device 41 .

When the data range corresponding to the display range by the first sub-display device 43 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, an image for displaying the rotation period image 153 on the first sub-display device 43 is obtained as shown in FIG. 51(c). Data 157 are obtained. Further, when the data range corresponding to the display range by the second sub-display device 44 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, as shown in FIG. of image data 158 is obtained.

After the various image data 156 to 158 are cut out as described above, the various image data 156 to 158 are changed into data formats corresponding to the display devices 41, 43 and 44 to be used. Specifically, the resolution of the main display device 41 is 800×600, while the resolution of both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is 572×180. Therefore, the image data 156 corresponding to the main display device 41 is adjusted to the number of pixels corresponding to the resolution of the main display device 41, and the image data 157 and 158 corresponding to the sub display devices 43 and 44 are adjusted to the sub display device 43. , 44 to the number of pixels corresponding to the resolution.

Furthermore, while the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a 3D image on the main display device 41 , the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a 2D image on the sub display devices 43 and 44 . In this case, when the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the main display device 41, the image data 156 is used as texture data to be pasted on the planar polygon. On the other hand, when the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, the image data 157 and 158 are used as sprite data. Therefore, adjustments are made to accommodate these data formats.

The creation of the image data 156 to 158 corresponding to the respective display devices 41, 43, 44 as described above is performed at each update timing during the rotation period. Therefore, as the image data for displaying the rotation period image 153 in the memory module 83, as shown in FIG. A second image data group 162 for the display device 43 and a third image data group 163 for the second sub-display device 44 are stored. Each of the first to third image data groups 161 to 163 contains image data of a number corresponding to the number of update timings included in the rotation period. The effect LSI 85 reads and uses the image data corresponding to each update timing from the first to third image data groups 161 to 163 during the rotation period.

Returning to the description of the rotational movement display setting process (FIG. 50), if it is the separation period (step S1813: YES), various images for displaying the separation period image 154 on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. Data usage settings are made, and various parameter information to be applied to the various image data are derived (steps S1814 to S1816). Rendering data is created according to the rendering list in which the information derived here is set, and image signals are output according to the rendering data, whereby the separation period image 154 is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. be done.

<Effect of Configuration for Displaying Rotation Period Image 153>
During the rotation period in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the rotation period image 153 is sub-displayed to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating. It is displayed on the display devices 43 and 44 . As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating without the player's awareness, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The rotation period image 153 is an image having no directivity in the direction along the display surfaces of the sub display devices 43 and 44 . As a result, the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 while the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, so that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating. can be made difficult for the player to identify.

The rotation period image 153 is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed on a non-rotating display surface without following the rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 . This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, part of the display surface of the main display device 41 exists around the display surfaces of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and part of the display surface An image corresponding to the rotation period image 153 on the sub display devices 43 and 44 is displayed in the area of . As a result, it is possible to display an image related to the rotation period image 153 displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 around the sub-display devices 43 and 44 that are rotating. The display device 41 and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 can perform an integrated display effect.

In particular, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the display surface of the main display device 41 exists over the entire periphery of the display surfaces of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 . As a result, it is possible for the player to have the illusion that the display surfaces of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are part of the display surface of the main display device 41, and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate. It becomes easy to perform an image display that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the presence.

Continuous images are displayed on the display devices 41 , 43 and 44 across the boundaries between the display surface of the main display device 41 and the display surfaces of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 . This makes it difficult for the player who pays attention to those images to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

The rotation positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are different between the timing when the rotation period starts and the timing when the rotation period ends. In this case, in a situation where the rotation period image 153 is displayed, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate and the corresponding image is displayed. The rotational positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are different. As a result, it is expected that the player will recognize that the rotational positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 have been changed without realizing it, and it is possible to provide the player with surprise.

Before and after the rotation period, images are displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 so that the player can easily recognize the rotation positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. During the rotation period, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate. A rotation period image 153 that is difficult for the player to recognize is displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 . This makes it possible to give the player a strong impression that the rotational positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 have been changed without realizing it.

<Configuration for Displaying Abnormality Notification Image 176>
Next, a configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on each display device 41, 43, 44 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10, there are a plurality of types of events for which anomaly notification is to be executed. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an event for which anomaly notification is to be executed. As shown in FIG. 52, events to be executed for abnormality notification include magnet detection, radio wave detection, large winning opening abnormality detection, disconnection abnormality, game ball ejection abnormality, movable body abnormality, and full tank abnormality. , vibration detection, door open, and frame open. Magnet detection is an event in which a magnetic force detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10 detects a magnetic force. The radio wave detection is an event in which radio waves are detected by a radio wave detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10 . The large winning opening abnormality detection is an event that detects the entry of a game ball to the special electric winning device 32 in a situation other than the open/close execution mode. Disconnection abnormality means that the main side MPU 62 receives a connection confirmation signal from the winning detection sensor provided in the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the through gate 35. It is an event that does not occur. The game ball discharge abnormality is an event in which discharge of game balls from the payout device 68 is not detected although the payout device 68 is drive-controlled to pay out the game balls. The movable body abnormality is a phenomenon in which the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 does not open even though the general electrical accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state. The full tank abnormality is an event in which the lower tray 56a is filled with game balls. Vibration detection is an event in which vibration is detected by a vibration detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10 . Door opening is an event in which the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. Frame opening refers to an event in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

When the above event occurs, the display light emitting unit 53 emits light for notification of abnormality, and the speaker unit 54 outputs an abnormality notification sound. Further, an abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. FIG. In the anomaly notification image 176, an image corresponding to the type of the event that triggered the execution of the anomaly notification is displayed. Specifically, characters indicating the type of the event are displayed. In this case, as already explained, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are displaceably provided, and as the sub display devices 43 and 44 are displaced, the main display device 41 becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Range changes. Along with this, the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176 differs according to the positions where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged.

53(a) to 53(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176. FIG. In a situation where both the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at their initial positions, the display surface of the main display device 41 faces the respective sub-display devices 43 and 44 as shown in FIG. 53(a). Most of them can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 except for a part of the area. Therefore, in a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the non-operating display range 171 excluding the upper and lower partial regions facing the respective sub-display devices 43 and 44 is used to notify the abnormality. It becomes the display range of the image 176 .

The non-operating display range 171 is set to a size capable of simultaneously displaying seven abnormality notification images 176 displayed in a predetermined size. On the other hand, as already explained, there are eight or more events for which anomaly notification is to be executed. In this case, if eight or more events for which anomaly notification is to be executed occur at the same time, the anomaly notification image 176 cannot be displayed for some of the events. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52, a priority is set for an event to be notified of anomaly, and an event to be notified of anomaly is selected according to the priority.

Priority is set to the highest for the first event group corresponding to fraudulent acts that may give a great disadvantage to the gaming hall. The first event group includes magnet detection, radio wave detection, and big prize opening abnormality detection. Next, a high priority is set for the second event group, which may prevent the game from progressing normally. The second event group includes disconnection abnormality, game ball discharge abnormality, movable body abnormality and full tank abnormality. The lowest priority is set for the third event group, which may occur during maintenance or the like even when the game is played normally. A third event group includes vibration detection, door open and frame open.

Since the display range 171 during non-operation is set to be wide enough to simultaneously display seven abnormal notification images 176 as described above, all the events included in the first event group and the second event group Even if all the events included in . On the other hand, if not only all the events included in the first event group and all the events included in the second event group but also the events included in the third event group occur at the same time, the events included in the third event group The anomaly notification image 176 corresponding to the event is not displayed. In this case, even if the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group is displayed first, all the events included in the first event group and all the events included in the second event group are displayed after that. occurs at the same time, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group that has been executed until then is interrupted, and the abnormality notification corresponding to the event with the higher priority is displayed. Display of image 176 begins. This makes it possible to give priority to the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event with the higher priority.

Further, after that, in a situation where the events included in the third event group continue, at least one of the events with the higher priority is canceled and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to that event ends. , the display of the anomaly notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group is started. As a result, when the display area of the abnormality notification image 176 has enough space, it is possible to display the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event occurring at that time.

Note that if the predetermined event occurs again in a situation in which the state in which the predetermined event has occurred has not been resolved and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the predetermined event is displayed, the abnormality notification that has already been performed Only the display of the image 176 is continued, and multiple abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the same event are not displayed. Further, when the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed so as to partially overwrite the image for effect.

Next, a case where an effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed will be described. When the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed, each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 moves between the initial position and the first side-by-side position (see FIG. 53(b)), the first side-by-side An area to be the installation position (see FIG. 53(c)), an area between the first juxtaposition position and the second juxtaposition position, an area to be the second juxtaposition position (see FIG. 53(d)), the second It is arranged in a region between the juxtaposed position and the separated position and a region that becomes the separated position (see FIG. 53(e)). In this case, if the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41 in a region that can face the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 may be hidden by the sub-display devices 43 and 44. FIG. On the other hand, if the area in which the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41 is to be finely switched according to the positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the processing configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 becomes complicated. put away. Therefore, the plurality of display ranges 172 to 174 of the main display device 41 that do not always face the sub-display devices 43 and 44 during the performance execution period for displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 become the display range of the abnormality notification image 176 . Specifically, a first display range 172 during operation set in the upper left corner of the main display device 41 and a second display range 172 during operation set in the upper right corner of the main display device 41. 173 and a third display range 174 during operation set in the lower right corner of the main display device 41 .

Each of the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 at the time of operation is set to a size that allows only one abnormality notification image 176 displayed in a predetermined size to be displayed. In other words, the number of abnormality notification images 176 that can be displayed simultaneously is three during the period in which the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed. On the other hand, as already explained, there are eight or more events for which anomaly notification is to be executed. Therefore, even in this case, an event to be displayed as the abnormality notification image 176 is selected according to the priority already described, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed for the selected event. For example, when four or more events for which anomaly notification is to be executed have occurred, three events with a high priority among those events are selected, and the anomaly notification corresponding to the selected three events is performed. Image 176 is displayed. When any of the events for which the abnormality notification image 176 is to be displayed is resolved and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 for that event is ended, the abnormality notification image 176 is not displayed. The display of the anomaly notification image 176 corresponding to the event with the lower priority is started.

Here, as already explained, the number of events included in the first event group is three. This number is equal to or less than the number of the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation, that is, the number of abnormality notification images 176 that can be displayed during the period during which the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed. there is As a result, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the first event group with the highest priority can be displayed immediately regardless of when the event occurs.

Note that if the predetermined event occurs again in a situation in which the state in which the predetermined event has occurred has not been resolved and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the predetermined event is displayed, the abnormality notification that has already been performed Only the display of the image 176 is continued, and multiple abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the same event are not displayed. Also, in areas other than the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation on the main display device 41, images for presentation are displayed.

FIGS. 54(a) to 54(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176 during the period when the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed. As shown in FIG. 54(a), when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first side-by-side position, the first abnormality, which is one of the above events, occurs. ), an abnormality notification image 176 indicating that the first abnormality has occurred is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation on the main display device 41 . In addition, a character image of "abnormal occurrence" is displayed as the common notification image 175 indicating that an abnormality has occurred on the first sub-display device 43 as well. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to grasp that some event has occurred, and furthermore, the first display range during operation By checking 172, it is possible to grasp the type of the event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed. It should be noted that the common notification image 175 is displayed so as to partially overwrite the image for effect on the sub display devices 43 and 44 .

Also, the types and positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 on which the common notification image 175 is displayed differ according to the displacement state of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 . Specifically, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are in the area between the initial position and the first side-by-side position (see FIG. 53(b)), and the area at the first side-by-side position (see FIG. 53(c)). , or when arranged in the region between the first side-by-side position and the second side-by-side position, the edge of the first sub-display device 43 opposite to the boundary side with the second sub-display device 44 A common notification image 175 is displayed at a position closer to the part. In addition, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 may be arranged in the second side-by-side position (see FIG. 53(d)), the area between the second side-by-side position and the separation position, or the separation position (see FIG. 53(d)). 53(e)), the common notification image 175 is displayed on the second sub-display device 44 at a position near the upper edge.

After that, when the second abnormality, which is one of the above events and is different from the first abnormality, occurs while the first abnormality is not resolved, the main display is shown in FIG. 54(c). An anomaly notification image 176 indicating that a second anomaly has occurred is displayed in the second display range 173 during operation of the device 41 . Even in this situation, the first sub-display device 43 continues to display the common notification image 175 of "abnormal occurrence". In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to grasp that some event has occurred, and furthermore, the first display range during operation By confirming 172 and the second display range 173 during operation, it is possible to grasp the type of the event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed.

After that, in a situation where both the first and second abnormalities have not been resolved, if any one of the above events occurs and the third abnormality, which is an event different from the first and second abnormalities, occurs. As shown in 54(d), an abnormality notification image 176 indicating that the third abnormality has occurred is displayed in the third display range 174 during operation of the main display device 41 . Even in this situation, the first sub-display device 43 continues to display the common notification image 175 of "abnormal occurrence". In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to grasp that some event has occurred, and furthermore, the first display range during operation 172, the second display range 173 during operation, and the third display range 174 during operation, it is possible to grasp the type of event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed.

In the situation shown in FIG. 54(d), for example, when the event of the first abnormality is resolved, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the first abnormality in the first display range 172 during operation is terminated. Even in this case, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the second abnormality in the second display range 173 during operation and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the third abnormality in the third display range 174 during operation Display continues. Thus, even if the display of the abnormality notification image 176 ends in the first display range 172 during operation in which the display start order of the abnormality notification image 176 is on the first side, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the side of the first display range 172 during the operation. Instead of shifting the display target area of the notification image 176, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 is continued as it is in the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation which are already displayed. , it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming whether or not the predetermined event continues.

In this manner, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation. When a new event occurs in a situation where the device is not in operation, an abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the newly occurred event is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation. Even in this case, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 that continues to be displayed continues in the display range 172 to 174 that has been displayed until then. Therefore, it becomes possible to facilitate the confirmation work of whether or not the predetermined event continues.

Also, in the situation shown in FIG. 54(d), if an event different from the first abnormal event, the second abnormal event, and the third abnormal event occurs, the priority of the newly generated event is 1st to 1st. If the priority of any event of the third abnormality is higher, the display range 172 ~ where the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event with the lowest priority among the first to third abnormality At 174, the abnormality notification image 176 that has already been displayed is erased, and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the newly occurring event is started. Even in this case, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 that continues to be displayed continues in the display range 172 to 174 that has been displayed until then. Therefore, it becomes possible to facilitate the confirmation work of whether or not the predetermined event continues.

A processing configuration for enabling display of the abnormality notification image 176 as described above will be described below. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing a notification command handling process executed by the performance CPU 82 . Note that processing for handling the notification command is executed in the command handling processing of step S503 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 14).

In the corresponding process of the notification command, if the notification start command is received from the distribution side MPU 73 (step S1901: YES), the notification type data corresponding to the notification start command is stored in the register of the production CPU 82 (step S1902 ). The main MPU 62 executes the management process of whether or not an event for which an abnormality notification is to be executed has occurred. The main MPU 62 transmits an abnormality occurrence command including information on the type of the event to the distribution MPU 73 when an event for which an abnormality notification is to be executed occurs. When the distribution side MPU 73 receives the abnormality occurrence command, it transmits to the performance CPU 82 a notification start command including information on the type of event that triggered the transmission of the abnormality occurrence command. By receiving this notification start command, the effect CPU 82 stores the notification type data in the register of the effect CPU 82 as described above. In addition, when a plurality of events occur simultaneously in the same period, the notification type data corresponding to each of the plurality of events is stored in the register of the CPU 82 for effect. Further, when a notification start command corresponding to an event of the same type as the event corresponding to the notification type data already stored in the register of the performance CPU 82 is received, new notification type data corresponding to the event is received. does not store.

If even one piece of notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, abnormality notification processing is executed in the light emission control task processing (step S504) in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 14). As a result, when even one piece of notification type data is stored in the register of the performance CPU 82, the display light emitting section 53 continues to emit light for abnormality notification. Further, when even one piece of notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the abnormality notification processing is executed in the task processing (step S505) for sound output control in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 14). be. As a result, when even one piece of notification type data is stored in the register of the performance CPU 82, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker unit 54 is continued. Further, when the notification type data is stored in the register of the performance CPU 82, processing for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on the display devices 41, 43, 44 is executed. The contents of this processing will be described later.

In the corresponding process of the notification command, if the notification cancellation command is received from the distribution side MPU 73 (step S1903: YES), the notification type data corresponding to the notification cancellation command is erased from the register of the production CPU 82 (step S1904 ). The main MPU 62 executes a management process as to whether or not the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed has occurred has been resolved. The main MPU 62 transmits an abnormality resolution command including information on the type of the event to the distribution MPU 73 when the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed is occurring is resolved. When the distribution-side MPU 73 receives the abnormality resolution command, it transmits to the performance CPU 82 a notification cancellation command including information on the type of event that triggered the transmission of the abnormality resolution command. By receiving this notification cancel command, the effect CPU 82 erases the notification type data corresponding to the notification cancel command from the register of the effect CPU 82 as described above. As a result, all anomaly reports corresponding to the deleted report type data are terminated.

The method of determining whether or not the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed has been resolved in the main MPU 62 uses the detection result of the detection sensor to determine whether or not the event has occurred. If the event is an event, when the detection result by the detection sensor corresponds to the detection result that the event has not occurred, the state in which the event for which the anomaly notification is to be executed is occurring is resolved. It is also possible to use a method of specifying that the event for which the abnormality notification is to be performed has occurred when the cancellation operation set in correspondence with the event for which the abnormality notification is to be performed is performed. A method of specifying that the state has been resolved may be used, and when the latter condition is satisfied after the former condition is satisfied, the event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed is occurring. It is good also as a method of specifying that was eliminated.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 56, the notification setting process executed by the performance CPU 82 will be described. Note that the notification setting process is executed in the effect calculation process of step S604 in the display control task process (FIG. 15).

If it is not the performance execution period for displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 (step S2001: NO), on condition that the notification type data is stored in the register of the performance CPU 82 (step S2002: YES), step S2003 proceed to In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the number of notification type data stored in the register of the performance CPU 82 is eight or more.

If the number of notification type data is less than 8 (step S2003: NO), the individual notification image data corresponding to all the notification type data are to be set in the current drawing list. Setting processing is executed (step S2004). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is set as the object to be drawn in the drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 this time.

By receiving the drawing list, the effect LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86, and uses the pre-transferred individual notification image data to display the current state. Abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to all the events to be notified are displayed in the non-operating display range 171 . In this case, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171 according to the order in which the events occurred regardless of the priority set for the event to be notified.

If the number of notification type data is 8 or more (step S2003: YES), 7 pieces of notification type data are extracted as notification targets in descending order of priority (step S2005). Then, a setting process is executed so that the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the selected seven notification type data are to be set in the current drawing list (step S2006). As a result, individual notification image data corresponding to each of the seven notification type data extracted in step S2005 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 this time.

By receiving the drawing list, the effect LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86, and uses the pre-transferred individual notification image data to perform step The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of the seven notification target events extracted in S2005 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171 . In this case, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171 according to the order in which the events occurred, regardless of the priority set for the event to be notified.

If it is the performance execution period for displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 (step S2001: YES), on condition that the notification type data is stored in the register of the performance CPU 82 (step S2007: YES), step S2008 proceed to In step S2008, setting is made so that the common notification image data for displaying the common notification image 175 on either the first sub-display device 43 or the second sub-display device 44 is to be set in the current drawing list. Execute the process. In this case, the drawing list information is set so that the types and positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 to be displayed with the common notification image 175 are different according to the positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, as described above.

After that, when the number of notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is less than 4 (step S2009: NO), the individual notification image data corresponding to each of all the notification type data is displayed this time. A setting process is executed to make the object to be set in the drawing list (step S2010). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is set as the object to be drawn in the drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 this time.

Upon receiving the drawing list, the effect LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the common notification image data and individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86 . Then, using the pre-transferred common notification image data, the common notification image 175 is displayed at the position corresponding to the current displacement state on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 corresponding to the current displacement state. do. In addition, by using the individual notification image data transferred in advance, an abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each event to be notified that is currently occurring is displayed in the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 at the time of operation. to be displayed with In this case, even if the number of types of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed decreases or increases, the display range 172 to 174 to be displayed of the abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed from the previous timing is changed. not.

When the number of notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is four or more (step S2009: YES), the three notification type data are to be notified in order from the already explained higher priority side. (step S2011). Then, a setting process is executed so that the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the three randomly selected notification type data are to be set in the current drawing list (step S2012). As a result, individual notification image data corresponding to each of the three notification type data extracted in step S2011 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 this time.

Upon receiving the drawing list, the effect LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the common notification image data and individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86 . Then, using the pre-transferred common notification image data, the common notification image 175 is displayed at the position corresponding to the current displacement state on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 corresponding to the current displacement state. do. Further, using the pre-transferred individual notification image data, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of the three notification target events extracted in step S2011 is displayed in the first to third display ranges during operation. 172 to 174 to be displayed. In this case, even if the number of types of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed decreases or increases, the display range 172 to 174 to be displayed of the abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed from the previous timing is changed. not.

<Effect of Configuration for Displaying Abnormality Notification Image 176>
Even in a situation in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at predetermined facing positions (positions other than the initial positions) where the range facing the display surface of the main display device 41 is widened, when the event to be notified occurs. An abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41 . As a result, even if the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are not arranged at predetermined facing positions due to some kind of failure, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed by the player or the It is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize it.

The abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41 in an area that does not face the sub-display devices 43 and 44 throughout the execution period of the displacement effect. As a result, the visibility of the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the main display device 41 is ensured without performing control such as changing the display position of the abnormality notification image 176 according to the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44. becomes possible.

In the configuration in which the area for displaying the abnormality notification images 176 on the display surface of the main display device 41 is limited during the execution period of the displacement effect, the number of the abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed during the execution period of the displacement effect is a predetermined number. is limited to This makes it possible to secure a certain size of the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41 .

A plurality of types of notification target events are set with priority to be displayed in the abnormality notification image 176, and if a number of notification target events exceeding the predetermined number occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect, the priority is high. The anomaly notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event on the side is preferentially displayed. As a result, even if the number of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed on the main display device 41 is limited to a predetermined number during the execution period of the displacement effect, the notification target event with the higher priority can be handled. It becomes possible to display the abnormality notification image 176 .

When a notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect, the common notification image 175 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 . This makes it possible to emphasize that the event to be reported has occurred.

The common notification image 175 is a common image that does not correspond to the type of notification target event. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for displaying the common notification image 175 on the sub display devices 43 and 44 .

Only one common notification image 175 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 even if the notification target event occurs multiple times. As a result, it is possible to secure a large area in which images other than the common notification image 175 are displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 .

<Configuration for image display using special moving image data 185>
Next, a configuration for displaying an image using the special moving image data 185 will be described.

As image data, there is moving image data as already explained. As this moving image data, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57, the memory module 83 stores a normal moving image data group 181 including a plurality of types of normal moving image data 184 and a special moving image data group 181 including a plurality of types of special moving image data 185 . A moving image data group 182 and an attached image data group 183 including a plurality of types of attached image data are stored in advance.

FIG. 58(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the normal moving image data 184. FIG. In the normal moving image data 184, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data consists of one frame of I-picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P-picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B-picture data corresponding to the second difference data. and have

The I-picture data is data that can be used alone to create one frame of still image data when decoded. P-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames before when decoding. . B-picture data can be bidirectionally predicted by referring to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames before and I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames after when decoding. , is data capable of creating still image data for one frame.

In the compressed data in the normal moving image data 184, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Also, B picture data is set as the data of the 2nd frame, . . . , m−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the m-th frame data. B-picture data is set as the m+1-th, . . . , n-1-th frame data. Also, P picture data is set as the n-th frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of picture data is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary.

By executing a decoding process on the normal moving image data 184, the decoded image data 184a to 184d corresponding to a plurality of update timings (hereinafter referred to as normal decoded image data 184a to 184d) are stored in the register 93 from the normal moving image data 184. is created in the expansion area 119 (see FIG. 16) for moving images in . These normal decoded image data 184a to 184d are image data in which the contents of some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d are different from each other.

FIG. 58(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 185. As shown in FIG. In the special moving image data 185, file data is set at the first address, followed by a plurality of I picture data corresponding to reference data, but no compressed data other than these I picture data is set. By executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185, decoded image data 185a to 185d corresponding to a plurality of update timings (hereinafter referred to as special decoded image data 185a to 185d) from the special moving image data 185 are stored in the register 93. is created in the expansion area 119 (see FIG. 16) for moving images in . These special decoded image data 185a to 185d are image data in which the contents of at least a part of the images displayed by the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are different from each other.

The data amount of the special moving image data 185 is set so that the minimum number of units of decoded image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Specifically, for the decoded image data of the minimum unit number, the special moving image data 185 is set with 48 I picture data, and the special moving image data 185 creates 48 special decoded image data 185a to 185d. can be played. Some of the normal moving image data 184 have a data amount set so that normal decoded image data 184a to 184d for the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. In some cases, the amount of data is set so that normal decoded image data 184a to 184d in a number larger than the minimum number of units that can be set as image data can be generated.

Special decoded image data 185a-185d are used as texture data. The memory module 83 stores in advance predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 185a to 185d as texture data. All of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are intended to be applied to the same predetermined object data. The types of 185a to 185d are changed sequentially. That is, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d continuously change the display content of the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data over a plurality of update timings by sequentially changing the texture data applied to the predetermined object data. It is used as serial number texture data for changing. For example, if the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data is a character image representing an object other than a person, cat, fish, dog, or animal, the type of special decoded image data 185a to 185d to be applied to the predetermined object data is By sequentially changing the special decoded image data 185a to 185d in accordance with the order of serial numbers, the pattern and color of the character image will change continuously over a plurality of update timings. Further, for example, when the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data is a background image, the type of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d to be applied to the predetermined object data is determined in the order of the serial numbers of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d. , the pattern of the background image, the color of the background image, the type of the individual image included in the background image, the display position of the individual image included in the background image, etc. are continuously changed over a plurality of update timings. will change to

By setting the special moving image data 185 as described above, it is possible to store serial texture data in the memory module 83 as one piece of moving image data. The moving image data is pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 as already described, but the decoded image data created by the execution of the decoding process by the moving image decoder 95 is stored in the moving image developing area 119 in the register 93. written. The decoded image data is stored and held in the moving image expansion area 119 until all uses thereof are completed. By preparing serial number texture data as the special moving image data 185 in such a configuration, the special moving image data 185 is temporarily stored in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 when using the serial number texture data. However, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d functioning as sequential texture data are stored and held in the moving image expansion area 119 of the register 93, not in the pre-transfer area 86a. As a result, it becomes possible to use the expansion area 119 for moving images as a reading area for the special decoded image data 185a to 185d that use serial number textures.

Also, all of the compressed data included in the special moving image data 185 are I picture data, and do not include P picture data and B picture data. That is, the same number of I-picture data as the number of special decoded image data 185a-185d after decoding is set, and one piece of special decoded image data 185a-185d is created from one piece of I-picture data. . As a result, even if the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by decoding the special moving image data 185 is used as texture data, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are used for display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image quality of the image to be degraded compared to the case of using normal texture data.

The attached image data stored in the attached image data group 183 are each of the plurality of normal moving image data 184 included in the normal moving image data group 181 and the plurality of special moving image data 185 included in the special moving image data group 182. are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each other. The attached image data displays images corresponding to the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d based on the moving image data 184, 185 while the corresponding moving image data 184, 185 is being decoded. This is still image data used for Specifically, the attached image data is set such that the image content of the corresponding decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d has continuity with the decoded image data in the first order of use. . For example, the attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data 185 is texture data applied to the predetermined object data corresponding to the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created from the special moving image data 185. FIG.

How the moving image data 184 and 185 are decoded using the period during which the image using the attached image data is displayed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 59(a) shows a period during which image display is performed using attached image data, FIG. 59(b) shows a period for decoding moving image data 184 and 185, and FIG. 59(c) shows decoded image data 184a. 184d and 185a to 185d are used to indicate the period during which image display is performed.

At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 59(b), decoding processing of one moving image data 184, 185 is started, so that one moving image data as shown in FIG. An image display period using the attached image data corresponding to the data 184 and 185 is started. After that, at the timing t2, which is the timing in the middle of the display period of the image using the attached image data, the decoding processing of the moving image data 184 and 185 is completed as shown in FIG. 59(b). As a result, decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the one piece of moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in moving image development area 119 in register 93. FIG. After that, at timing t3, the display of the image using the attached image data ends as shown in FIG. 59(a). An image display period using 184d and 185a to 185d is started. This display period ends at the timing t4 when the display of the image using the last decoded image data among the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by the above decoding process ends.

As described above, the attached image data is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the moving image data 184 and 185, and the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 is performed using the display period of the image using the attached image data. is executed. As a result, the moving image data 184 and 185 are decoded under the condition that images corresponding to images displayed using the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are displayed. . Therefore, it is possible to decode the moving image data 184 and 185 without waiting for image display while ensuring the continuity of image display.

A processing configuration for displaying an image using the moving image data 184 and 185 will be described below. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the moving image data use setting process executed by the performance CPU 82. As shown in FIG. The moving image data use setting process is executed in the background calculation process of step S603 or the effect calculation process of step S604 in the task process (FIG. 15).

If it is not the usage period of the moving image data 184, 185 (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not it is time to start decoding processing of one moving image data 184, 185 (step S2102). If it is time to start the decoding process (step S2102: YES), one moving image data 184, 185 to be decoded this time is grasped (step S2103), and the moving image data 184, 185 is The corresponding attached image data is grasped (step S2104). Decoding designation information indicating that the decoding process should be executed is set in the current drawing list (step S2105).

By executing the processing of steps S2103 to S2105, one piece of moving image data 184 and 185 and the associated attached image data are set in the current drawing list as the image data to be used. When the moving image data 184 and 185 are set in the draw list, the moving image data 184 and 185 are pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 as already described, and the pre-transferred moving image data 184 , 185 are decoded by the video decoder 95 . However, in the drawing process corresponding to the current drawing list, the moving image data 184, 185 and the decoded image data 184a-184d, 185a-185d created from the moving image data 184, 185 are not subject to the drawing process. Instead, the attached image data is the target of rendering processing.

If a negative determination is made in step S2102, or if the process of step S2105 is executed, various types of image data other than the moving image data 184, 185 and attached image data are grasped as objects to be set in the drawing list this time (step S2106). ). Then, the parameter information to be applied to the various image data set in the drawing list this time is updated and grasped as the setting target in the drawing list (step S2107).

Here, as already explained, when the moving image data 184 and 185 are set in the rendering list, the advance transfer control unit 94 of the production LSI 85 makes an affirmative determination in step S1013 in the advance transfer process (FIG. 29), A decoding instruction for the moving image data 184 and 185 is issued to the moving image decoder 95 of the effect LSI 85 (step S1014). When issuing this decoding instruction, the moving image decoder 95 can identify the area in the data storage area 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 in which the moving image data 184 and 185 that are the target of this decoding instruction are stored. and the area for storing the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d obtained by decoding the moving image data 184 and 185 in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93 can be specified in the moving image decoder 95. and information for the video decoder 95 .

FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the decoding process executed by the video decoder 95. FIG. In the decoding process, based on the information provided by the advance transfer control unit 94, the address of the area in which the moving image data 184 and 185, which is the target of the current decoding instruction, is stored in the data storage area 123 ( step S2201). Also, based on the information provided by the advance transfer control unit 94, decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d obtained by decoding the moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the moving image development area 119 of the register 93. The address of the area to be set is grasped (step S2202). Thereafter, moving image data 184 and 185 are read out from the data storage area 123 corresponding to the address grasped in step S2201, and the moving image data 184 and 185 are decoded. Then, each of the decoded image data 184a-184d and 185a-185d of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S2202 (step S2203). As a result, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the moving image data 184 and 185 are developed in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93. FIG. In this case, the decoded image data in the first order among the generated decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d is stored in the start address area of the moving image rendering area 119. FIG. Then, subsequent decoded image data are sequentially stored in areas that are continuous with respect to the area of the start address.

Returning to the description of the moving image data use setting process (FIG. 60), if the moving image data 184 and 185 are within the use period (step S2101: YES), decoding corresponding to the value of the frame counter provided in the work memory 84 is performed. The image data is grasped as an object to be set in the drawing list this time (step S2108). The frame counter selects which number of the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by executing the decoding process on one moving image data 184 and 185. It is a counter for specifying by the performance CPU 82 whether to display the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d. Each time the data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are set in the drawing list as objects to be used, 1 is added. When the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d corresponding to the value of the frame counter are set as objects to be used in the drawing list, the area corresponding to the value of the frame counter in the expansion area 119 for moving images in the register 93 of the production LSI 85 address as address information. As a result, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the production LSI 85 can specify the area in which the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d to be used are stored. The decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are read from and drawn.

After that, various image data other than the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are grasped as objects to be set in the current drawing list (step S2109). Also, the parameter information to be applied to the various image data set in the current drawing list is updated and grasped as the setting target in the drawing list (step S2110). Then, use instruction information for the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d indicating that the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d should be used is set in the current rendering list (step S2111).

As already explained, the pre-transfer control unit 94 pre-transfers the image data set in the drawing list received from the effect CPU 82 to the pre-transfer area 86a. , 185a to 185d are set, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are already stored in the moving image decompression area 119 in the register 93 at that time, so they are transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a. no prior transfer of Specifically, in the preliminary transfer process (FIG. 29), it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the data to be transferred this time is the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d. 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d (step S1003: YES), the processing for pre-transfer shown in steps S1004 to S1012 is not executed.

Further, as already described, the preliminary transfer control unit 94 performs rewriting processing of the address information set in the drawing list received from the effect CPU 82 for the image data previously transferred to the preliminary transfer area 86a (FIG. 30). However, as described above, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are not subject to pre-transfer to the pre-transfer area 86a. (FIG. 30) is not executed. Specifically, in the preliminary transfer process (FIG. 29), it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the data to be transferred this time is the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d. If it is determined to be 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d (step S1003: YES), the address information rewriting process shown in step S1015 is not executed. As described above, for the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, the address of the area stored in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93 is used as the address information in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82. is set.

<Effect of configuration for image display using special moving image data 185>
Since the special moving image data 185 including I picture data without including B picture data and P picture data, which are difference data, is provided, the special moving image data 185 is created by executing a decoding process. The special decoded image data 185a-185d can be of higher image quality than the normal decoded image data 184a-184d created by executing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 184. FIG. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to handle image data having image quality equivalent to that of normal still image data as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to use image data having the same image quality as that of the normal still image data without using an area for reading the normal still image data.

The special moving image data 185 includes a plurality of I picture data. As a result, by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185, it is possible to create a plurality of pieces of image data whose image quality is approximately the same as that of normal still image data.

A plurality of special decoded image data 185 a to 185 d created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 185 are used according to the order of use defined in the special moving image data 185 . Thus, when using a plurality of special decoded image data 185a to 185d, there is no need to set the order of use separately from the special moving image data 185. FIG. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are pre-stored in the memory module 83 as normal still image data, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the order of use of the image data.

During the period when the drawing process is executed in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, the special moving image data 185 is decoded by the moving image decoder 95 provided separately from the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period during which the decoding process is being performed from becoming an image display waiting period while preventing an increase in the processing load on the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 .

Attached image data is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the moving image data 184, 185, and decoding processing of the moving image data 184, 185 is executed using the display period of the image using the attached image data. be. As a result, the moving image data 184 and 185 are decoded under the condition that images corresponding to images displayed using the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are displayed. . Therefore, it is possible to decode the moving image data 184 and 185 without waiting for image display while ensuring the continuity of image display.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 do not display 3D images and only 2D images are displayed. Both 2D and 3D images can be displayed at 43 and 44 . The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing area 191 for sub-display in this embodiment. A sub first frame area 117 and a sub second frame area 118 are provided in the sub display drawing area 191 in the same manner as the sub display drawing area 116 in the first embodiment. In addition to the frame areas 117 and 118, the sub-display drawing area 191 includes a first sub-2D drawing area 192 in which drawing data for displaying a 2D image on the first sub-display device 43 is created. 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub, in which drawing data for displaying a 3D image on the first sub display device 43 is created, and drawing data for displaying a 2D image on the second sub display device 44 are generated. A 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub to be created and a 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub to create drawing data for displaying a 3D image on the second sub display device 44 are provided. .

The drawing data created in the 2D drawing region 192 for the first sub and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing region 193 for the first sub are respectively stored in the sub first frame region 117 and the sub second frame region 118 . 1 frame of drawing data to be displayed on the first sub-display device 43 is created by synthesizing the data with the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub and the drawing data for the second sub-use. 1 frame of drawing data to be displayed on the second sub-display device 44 is created by synthesizing the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 . Further, as in the first embodiment, drawing data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 are distributed and set in odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118. Drawing data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 are distributed and set on even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction.

A processing configuration for creating drawing data in the frame areas 117 and 118 will be described below. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing drawing data synthesizing processing for sub display executed by the 3D control unit 97 . Note that the drawing data synthesizing process for sub-display is executed as part of the drawing data synthesizing process in step S814 in the 3D rendering process (FIG. 20).

When drawing data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 is to be created (step S2301: YES), the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is first set as the output source area (step S2302). After that, a setting process for the number of times of drawing provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2303). When the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set as the output source area, the number of drawing times counter is set in units of vertical lines for the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 uses it to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction. In step S2303, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set in the drawing count counter.

After that, in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub, the vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the number-of-drawing counter is extracted (step S2304). Among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 are drawn. The vertical line data extracted in step S2304 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2305).

After that, 1 is subtracted from the drawing number counter (step S2306). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-drawing counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2307). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processing of steps S2304 and S2305 is executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. By repeating the processing of steps S2304 and S2305, rendering of the rendering data created in the 3D rendering area 193 for the first sub to the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

After that, the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set as the output source area (step S2308). Then, a setting process for the number of times of drawing provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2309). When the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set as the output source area, the number of drawing times counter is set in units of vertical lines for the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 uses it to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction. In step S2309, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set in the drawing count counter.

After that, in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub, vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the number-of-drawing counter is extracted (step S2310). Among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 are drawn. The vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2311).

Here, part of the drawing data that has already been created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is drawn on the vertical lines of the frame areas 117 and 118 . Therefore, in step S2311, one of overwriting processing of color information, blending processing of color information, and non-setting of color information is performed according to the α data attached to the vertical line data extracted in step S2310. to run. Specifically, when the α data corresponds to opacity, the data of the vertical line extracted in step S2310 is overwritten as it is on the vertical line to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 . If the α data corresponds to translucency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 and the data set for the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 are made to correspond to the value of the α data. to blend. If the α data corresponds to complete transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is not set. As a result, it is possible to create drawing data as a result of overlapping the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub. It becomes possible.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the drawing number counter (step S2312). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-drawing counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2313). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processing of steps S2310 and S2311 is executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. By repeating the processing of steps S2310 and S2311, the drawing of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing region 192 for the first sub to the frame regions 117 and 118 is completed.

On the other hand, when drawing data corresponding to the second sub display device 44 is to be created (step S2301: NO), the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is first set as the output source area (step S2314). After that, a setting process for the number of times of drawing provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2315). When the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set as the output source area, the number of drawing times counter is set in units of vertical lines for the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 uses it to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction. In step S2315, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set in the drawing count counter.

After that, in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub, the vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the number-of-drawing counter is extracted (step S2316). Among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame regions 117 and 118 are drawn. The vertical line data extracted in step S2316 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2317).

After that, 1 is subtracted from the drawing number counter (step S2318). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-drawing counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2319). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processing of steps S2316 and S2317 is executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. By repeating the processing of steps S2316 and S2317, rendering of the rendering data created in the 3D rendering area 195 for the second sub to the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

After that, the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set as the output source area (step S2320). Then, a setting process for the number of times of drawing provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2321). When the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set as the output source area, the number of drawing times counter is set in units of vertical lines for the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 uses it to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction. In step S2321, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set in the drawing count counter.

After that, in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub, the vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the number-of-drawing counter is extracted (step S2322). Among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame regions 117 and 118 are drawn. The vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2323).

Here, part of the drawing data that has already been created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is drawn on the vertical lines of the frame areas 117 and 118 . Therefore, in step S2323, one of color information overwriting processing, color information blending processing, and color information non-setting is performed in accordance with the α data attached to the vertical line data extracted in step S2322. to run. Specifically, if the α data corresponds to opacity, the data of the vertical line extracted in step S2322 is overwritten as it is on the vertical line to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 . If the α data corresponds to translucency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 and the data set for the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 are made to correspond to the value of the α data. to blend. If the α data corresponds to complete transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is not set. As a result, it is possible to create drawing data as a result of overlapping the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub. It becomes possible.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the drawing number counter (step S2324). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-drawing counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2325). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processing of steps S2322 and S2323 is executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. By repeating the processing of steps S2322 and S2323, the drawing of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing region 194 for the second sub to the frame regions 117 and 118 is completed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even in a configuration in which a 2D image and a 3D image can be displayed simultaneously on the sub-display devices 43 and 44, drawing for displaying an image on the first sub-display device 43 is performed. Both the data and the drawing data for displaying the image on the second sub-display device 44 can be created in one frame area 117, 118 at the same time.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the address information rewriting process (FIG. 30 in the first embodiment) in the preliminary transfer control unit 94 is different from that in the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing rewriting processing of address information in this embodiment. First, the area of the VRAM 86 where the image data to be transferred this time is transferred is set as a new index area (step S2401). Incidentally, in this embodiment, the pre-transfer area 86a having the data storage area 123 is not set in the VRAM 86. FIG. Therefore, the image data to be transferred is not transferred to the data storage area 123, but is the image data set in the drawing list at this time or before and which has not yet been subjected to drawing processing. It is transferred to an area different from the area where the data is stored.

After that, the index table provided in the register 93 is rewritten (step S2402). The index table is a table in which the correspondence relationship between index information for specifying the index area and the address group of the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time is transferred is set. In the index table, correspondence relationships between index information and address groups in areas of the VRAM 86 are set for the number of image data previously transferred to the VRAM 86 . In the index table rewriting process, the index information for specifying the index area newly set in step S2401 and the address group of the area of the VRAM 86 where the image data to be transferred this time are transferred are associated with each other. Write to the index table in the state

After that, the address information corresponding to the image data to be transferred this time in the drawing list is overwritten with the index information for specifying the newly set index area (step S2403). When drawing the image data, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 read index information corresponding to the image data from the address information in the drawing list and provide the read index information to the transfer controller 92 . The transfer controller 92 grasps the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the provided index information from the index table, and provides the image data read from the area of the VRAM 86 to the 2D control section 96 or the 3D control section 97 .

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, by changing the relationship between the type of index area and the area of the VRAM 86 as necessary, it is possible to flexibly use the area aggregation specification of the VRAM 86 using the index area. becomes possible.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided as a drawing list for displaying an image at one update timing from the effect CPU 82, the pre-transfer control unit of the effect LSI 85 Consolidation of the draw lists is performed at 94 . The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing drawing list output processing in this embodiment executed by the effect CPU 82 .

First, 2D image data aggregation processing is executed (step S2501). In the aggregation process, all image data to be set in the 2D drawing list are specified in the current process. After that, it is determined whether or not the number of pieces of 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S2502). If the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is less than the reference number (step S2502: NO), one 2D drawing list is created (step S2503). All of the 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 are set in the single 2D rendering list. Then, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 2D rendering list (step S2504). The 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19), and specifies in one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to image display for one frame. It specifies that the drawing process has been completed for all the image data.

On the other hand, if the number of pieces of 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is greater than or equal to the reference number (step S2502: YES), two 2D drawing lists are created (step S2505). In this case, the 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is distributed and set in two 2D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. The number of pieces of image data in both of these two 2D rendering lists is less than the reference number. Of these two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 first sets the integration instruction information to the 2D drawing list to be executed for drawing processing (step S2506). Specifically, the integration instruction information is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 2D drawing list. The integration instruction information instructs the preliminary transfer control unit 94 of the performance LSI 85 to integrate two continuous drawing lists that are the targets of the preliminary transfer processing into one drawing list. It is information for After that, among these two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 sets the creation completion data to the 2D drawing list to be subjected to drawing processing later (step S2507). Specifically, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 2D drawing list.

In the drawing list output process, if the process of step S2504 or step S2507 is executed, the 3D image data aggregation process is executed (step S2508). In the aggregation process, all the image data to be set in the 3D drawing list are specified in the current process. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of pieces of 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S2509). If the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is less than the reference number (step S2509: NO), one 3D rendering list is created (step S2510). All the 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 are set in the single 3D drawing list. Then, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 3D rendering list (step S2511). The 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not creation completion data is set in the 3D rendering process (FIG. 20), thereby specifying in one or two 3D rendering lists corresponding to image display for one frame. It specifies that the drawing process has been completed for all the image data.

On the other hand, if the number of pieces of 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is greater than or equal to the reference number (step S2509: YES), two 3D drawing lists are created (step S2512). In this case, the 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is dispersed and set in two 3D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. The number of pieces of image data in both of these two 3D rendering lists is less than the reference number. Of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 first sets integration instruction information to the 3D drawing list that is to be subjected to drawing processing (step S2513). Specifically, the integration instruction information is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 3D rendering list. After that, among these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 sets the creation completion data to the 3D drawing list to be subjected to drawing processing later (step S2514). Specifically, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 3D drawing list.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S2511 or step S2514 is executed, other processes are executed (step S2515). In other processing, the processing of steps S919 to S921 of the rendering list output processing (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment is executed. It should be noted that the processing of steps S901 to S906 of the rendering list output processing (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment may be executed before step S2501.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing advance transfer processing in this embodiment executed by the advance transfer control unit 94 .

First, other processing is executed (step S2601). In other processes, the processes of steps S1001 to S1015 of the advance transfer process (FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, on condition that advance transfer for one drawing list has been completed in the current processing (step S2602: YES), it is determined whether integration instruction information is set in the current drawing list. (Step S2603). If the integration instruction information is set (step S2603: YES), the drawing list that is set in the next order to the drawing list that has been pre-transferred this time is stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 of the register 93 in advance. It is read out as an execution target of transfer processing (step S2604). After that, the integration flag provided in the register 93 is set to "1" (step S2605).

On the other hand, if no integration instruction information is set in the current rendering list (step S2603: NO), the integration process is performed on condition that the integration flag of the register 93 is set to "1" (step S2606: YES). is executed (step S2607). In the integration process, the drawing list for which the integration instruction information has been set and the drawing list for which advance transfer has been completed this time are integrated as one drawing list. In this case, the image data set in each drawing list is aggregated into one drawing list while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. After that, the integration flag of the register 93 is cleared to "0" (step S2608).

If a negative determination is made in step S2606, or if the process of step S2608 is executed, advance transfer completion process is executed (step S2609). In the pre-transfer completion processing, if the drawing list for which pre-transfer has been completed this time is not subject to integration processing (step S2607), the drawing list is stored in the post-transfer storage area 122 of the register 93 as the current storage target. are stored in storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the drawing list that has been pre-transferred this time is the target of the integration processing (step S2607), one drawing list after the integration processing is stored in the post-transfer storage area 122 of the register 93 this time. Store in the target storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, the effect The plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are integrated into one drawing list in the preliminary transfer control unit 94 of the LSI 85 . This eliminates the need to refer to a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists when the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97 executes drawing processing according to the drawing list.

Also, the drawing list integration as described above is executed when the preliminary transfer processing of image data for a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists is completed in the preliminary transfer control unit 94 . This makes it possible to use the opportunity to pre-transfer image data as the opportunity to integrate a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists.

Note that the number of drawing lists to be executed for integration processing is not limited to two, and three or more 2D drawing lists or three or more 3D drawing lists are required to display an image for one frame. If the list is supplied from the effect CPU 82, the number may be three. Also, the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list provided by the presentation CPU 82 for displaying one frame of image may be subjected to the integration process.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) When image data that has already been read into the preliminary transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is newly set as a read target in the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, the image data is the data of the preliminary transfer area 86a. Instead of the configuration limited to the configuration in which the image data is copied between the storage areas 123, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 in which the image data is already stored is used as the address information of the drawing list. may be configured to be set to In this case, the image data to be read cannot be stored in the data storage area 123 to which the image data is to be written, but it is not necessary to copy the image data between the data storage areas 123 .

(2) A history area may be provided separately from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, and the image data pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a may be stored in the history area in accordance with the pre-transfer order. In this case, for example, a storage area capable of storing a plurality of image data such as 256 or 512 is secured as a history area. Image data is stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order, and when image data is stored in the storage area in the last order, the storage area in the first order stores the image data. The configuration is to be stored. In this configuration, each time new image data is pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is stored in the storage area that is the storage target in the history area. When the image data specified in the drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82 is read out to the preliminary transfer area 86a, first, the image data is stored in any of the history areas. Determines whether or not it is stored in the area. If the image data is stored in any storage area of the history area, the image data stored in that storage area is read to the pre-transfer area 86a. On the other hand, if the image data is not stored in any storage area of the history area, the image data is read from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, and the read image data becomes the current storage object in the history area. stored in the storage area Even with this configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency of reading image data from the memory module 83 . Also, with this configuration, a history area is provided separately from the preliminary transfer area 86a. It is possible to make it read out. Note that the history area may be provided in a RAM separate from the VRAM 86. FIG.

(3) Instead of setting in the search table 125 only the address ID corresponding to the start address among the address ID group set in the address information of the drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82, Only the corresponding address ID may be set in the search table 125 , or only the address ID corresponding to the intermediate address may be set in the search table 125 . Alternatively, the address ID corresponding to the start address and the address ID corresponding to the final address may be set in the search table 125, or the entire address ID group may be set in the search table 125. . This makes it possible to more accurately identify the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a.

(4) Instead of setting an address ID in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123, for example, identification information is set for each piece of image data. If the image data is stored, the identification information thereof may be set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of the image data. In this case, if the identification information contains less information than one address ID, the amount of information for specifying the type of image data can be reduced.

(5) A resident area is provided in the VRAM 86 separately from the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data for starting variation and the image data for announcing an abnormality necessary for starting the effect for the game round are supplied to the CPU 82 for effect. may be read into the resident area when the supply of the operating power is started, and the read state may be maintained while the operating power is being supplied. In this case, even if the start condition for starting the effect for the game cycle or the start condition for starting the abnormality notification is satisfied at any timing, the image can be displayed using the image data read from the resident area. , it is possible to shorten the period required from the establishment of the start condition to the start of image display, as compared with the case where the image data is read out from the memory module 83 .

(6) If the data to be read has already been read to the RAM, the data is not read from the ROM, and if the data to be read has already been read to the RAM, that data is not read from the ROM. The configuration of copying data between areas of the RAM may be applied to data other than image data.

(7) When the pre-transfer of the image data specified in the drawing list to the pre-transfer area 86a is completed, the identification information corresponding to the transfer destination data storage area 123 is overwritten on the address information of the drawing list. The configuration is not limited, and the identification information may be set in the drawing list as information separate from the address information. Even in this case, since information corresponding to the transfer destination area is not set in the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, the amount of information in the drawing list can be reduced.

(8) The pre-transfer control unit 94 identifies whether or not the image data specified in the drawing list has been stored in the data storage area 123 of the transfer destination in the pre-transfer area 86a. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 is set in the drawing list when the problem is identified. Accordingly, the fact that the identification information is set in the drawing list means that the reading of the image data has been completed.

(9) Data storage in the pre-transfer area 86a instead of the configuration in which the decoded image data 184a-184d and 185a-185d created by decoding the moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the register 93. It may be configured to be stored in the area 123 . In this configuration, when one piece of decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d is stored in one data storage area 123, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are stored in the data storage area. 123, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be set as the address information of the drawing list. Further, in the configuration in which the identification information is set even for the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d in this way, the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list is displayed in the immediately preceding display order. The image data corresponding to the priority data is read out to an area whose address is continuous with respect to the area from which the image data is read. Therefore, it is possible to set only the offset value to the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of address information after pre-transfer of image data is completed.

(10) When the preliminary transfer of the image data is completed, the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list is not limited to the configuration in which the offset value is set as the address information. Even in the case of data, identification information, which is information for specifying the address of the area from which the image data is read, may be set in the address information.

(11) When the advance transfer of data specified in instruction information such as a drawing list is completed, information corresponding to the transfer destination area of the data is set in the instruction information. It may be applied to a configuration that uses indication information different from the list.

(12) Instead of providing a maximum of two 2D rendering lists from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, 3 or 4 or more 2D rendering lists A configuration may be provided in which a list may be provided. Further, in place of the configuration in which a maximum of two 3D drawing lists are provided from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, three or four or more 3D drawing lists may be provided. may be provided.

(13) In place of the structure in which a plurality of drawing lists are always provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, one drawing list is provided to display an image at one update timing. A configuration may be adopted in which only the drawing list can be provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 . For example, in a configuration that does not have a function of displaying 3D images, only one 2D drawing list is provided. In this case, if the number of 2D image data to be used at one update timing is less than the reference number, only one drawing list is provided, and the 2D image data to be used at one update timing is the reference. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of drawing lists are provided as long as the number is greater than the number.

(14) The 2D image data and the 3D image data are not limited to the configuration in which different drawing lists are set, and the 2D image data and the 3D image data are set in the same drawing list. may be configured to be set to In this case, it is possible to reduce the number of drawing lists provided from the effect CPU 82 . However, in this configuration, it is necessary to clearly distinguish between 2D image data and 3D image data in the drawing list. Specifically, as a configuration for the distinction, display order priority data within a predetermined numerical range is set for 2D image data, and a specific numerical range that does not overlap with the predetermined numerical range is set for 3D image data. display order priority data is set. As a result, even if the 2D image data and the 3D image data are collectively set in the same drawing list, the 2D image data and the 3D image data can be combined into the drawing list. It is possible to make a clear distinction in

Further, in the configuration in which the 2D image data and the 3D image data are collectively set in the same drawing list as described above, one of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 After completing the drawing processing using the drawing list, the drawing processing using the drawing list is executed on the other side, so that there is no need to provide a plurality of the same drawing lists from the performance CPU 82 to the performance LSI 85.例文帳に追加

(15) The configuration in which the image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 are collectively set in one drawing list is not limited. The image data corresponding to one display device may be set in a separate drawing list from the image data corresponding to the other display devices. For example, a drawing list in which only image data corresponding to the main display device 41 is set and a drawing list in which image data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are set are sent from the presentation CPU 82. Alternatively, the drawing lists corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 may be provided from the effect CPU . In this case, the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set are distinguished for each drawing list. easier to do.

(16) A drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82 may be divided into a plurality of drawing lists in the effect LSI 85, and each divided drawing list may be used in the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97. good. For example, one rendering list in which 2D image data and 3D image data are aggregated as objects to be used is provided from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85, and the rendering LSI 85 transfers the image data in advance. The single drawing list may be divided into a drawing list in which 2D image data is set and a drawing list in which 3D image data is set depending on the timing. As a result, the drawing lists corresponding to the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 are individually provided to the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 while keeping the number of drawing lists provided from the effect CPU 82 small. It becomes possible to

(17) A plurality of identical drawing lists may be provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 . In this case, for example, not only the address ID corresponding to the storage source area of the image data in the memory module 83 but also the information corresponding to the storage destination area of the image data in the VRAM 86 is set in the drawing list. , one drawing list out of the same plurality of drawing lists may be provided to the advance transfer control section 94 and one drawing list may be provided to the 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97 . According to this configuration, it is possible to make a drawing list for which advance transfer of all image data has not been completed in the advance transfer control unit 94 a target for execution of drawing processing in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 .

(18) A readout completion flag is provided for each data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. A read completion flag corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be set to "1". In this case, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 read the image data from the data storage area 123 under the condition that the read completion flag is set to "1". Alternatively, the read completion flag corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the image data from being read from the data storage area 123 for which the image data has not yet been read.

(19) The number of areas of the VRAM 86 collectively designated by one identification information of the index areas 127a to 127c may be different for each of the index areas 127a to 127c. As a result, it is possible to designate an area having a size suitable for the type of data to be stored in each of the index areas 127a to 127c with one piece of identification information.

(20) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 are designated by one piece of identification information in the index areas 127a to 127c. good. Alternatively, there may be an index area in which one area of the VRAM 86 is designated by one piece of identification information and an index area in which a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 are designated by one piece of identification information.

(21) One index area 127a to 127c may include an area of VRAM 86 with discontinuous addresses, and an area of discontinuous addresses may be included as an area of VRAM 86 designated by one piece of identification information. may be configured.

(22) The special moving image data 185 is not limited to the configuration in which a plurality of types of I picture data are set, and the special moving image data 185 may be configured to set only one type of I picture data. . In this case, only one type of special decoded image data is created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185 . Even with this configuration, still image data such as texture data can be read out to an area different from the pre-transfer area 86 a of the VRAM 86 .

Also, in this configuration, a plurality of I picture data of the same type may be set in the special moving image data 185 . In this case, by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185, a plurality of identical special decoded image data will be created. In this configuration, when the same special decoded image data is used over a plurality of update timings, the same special decoded image data can be obtained simply by using the special decoded image data according to the order of use corresponding to the special moving image data 185. It can be used over multiple update timings. Further, when a plurality of identical special decoded image data are generated in this manner, only one of the special decoded image data is used, and the remaining special decoded image data are stored after the decoding process. It may be configured such that it is erased from the area in which it is located.

(23) A separate storage area is provided in the VRAM 86 or the register 93, and the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by decoding the special moving image data 185 are separately stored in the separate storage area. may be In this case, even if the usage period of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d has expired, the special moving image data 185a to 185d can be read out from the separate storage area for the next use. There is no need to perform decoding processing again for .

(24) The special moving image data 185 has difference data such as B-picture data and P-picture data, but the difference data may be set so that the difference is "0". In this case, a plurality of identical special decoded image data will be created.

(25) Texture data pre-stored in the memory module 83 as still image data are all read from the memory module 83 and stored in the VRAM 86 for texture use when the supply of operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. It may be configured to be written in the area. In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read out to the texture area is changed each time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the rendering LSI 85 will increase. On the other hand, by storing part of the texture data as the special moving image data 185, it is possible to eliminate the need to replace the texture area while part of the texture data is expanded for moving images in the register 93 as required. It becomes possible to read out to area 119 . Further, when the moving image development area 119 is also used as an area for using texture data, the texture data itself is not read into the moving image development area 119, but the special moving image data 185 is decoded. Since the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by the execution are read out, the handling of the dynamic image development area 119 in the production LSI 85 is changed according to the type of data read out to the dynamic image development area 119. no need arises.

In the above configuration, not only the texture data but also the object data may be read from the memory module 83 to the object area of the VRAM 86 when the supply of operating power to the performance CPU 82 is started. In this case, it is not necessary to read the object data to the VRAM 86 at appropriate timing.

(26) Drawing data for displaying an image on the first sub-display device 43 (hereinafter also referred to as first drawing data) and drawing data for displaying an image on the second sub-display device 44 (hereinafter referred to as second drawing data) are set in one frame area 117, 118, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are distributed over the odd-numbered vertical lines and the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal arrangement order. It is not limited to the configuration in which the drawing data is distributed and set.

For example, the first drawing data may be set in the left half of one frame region 117 or 118, and the second drawing data may be set in the right half. Alternatively, for example, the first drawing data may be set in the upper half of one frame region 117 or 118, and the second drawing data may be set in the lower half. Also, for example, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are distributed and set to the odd-numbered horizontal lines and the even-numbered horizontal lines in the vertical arrangement order in one frame region 117, 118. may be configured. In addition, instead of alternately arranging the first drawing portion data forming part of the first drawing data and the second drawing portion data forming part of the second drawing data in units of one line, The minimum unit dot of one drawing data and the minimum unit dot of the second drawing data may be alternately arranged in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

(27) The number of dots of the first sub-display device 43 and the number of dots of the second sub-display device 44 are not limited to the same configuration. A configuration having a different number of dots from 44 may be used. In this case, the number of dots included in the area reserved for setting the first drawing data in one frame area 117, 118 and the number of dots included in the area reserved for setting the second drawing data may be configured differently depending on the difference in the number of dots, or may be configured to be the same.

(28) In a situation where one of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is hidden behind the center frame 42 and cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the other display device A configuration in which a situation in which visual recognition is possible may occur may be adopted. In this case, the one display device hidden behind the center frame 42 may not display any image. Even with this configuration, drawing data for displaying an image on the other display device is set in a partial area corresponding to the drawing data in one frame area 117 or 118 . In this configuration, the drawing data corresponding to the one display device may not be set, and although the image is not displayed on the one display device, the drawing data corresponding to the one display device may be set. It may be configured to be In the case where drawing data corresponding to one of the display devices is set, regardless of whether or not an image is displayed on one of the display devices, one frame region 117 or 118 is displayed. In contrast, both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set.

Further, the one display device hidden behind the center frame 42 may display the same color. In this case, since the drawing data for displaying the same color is set as the drawing data corresponding to the one display device, the one display device is hidden behind the center frame 42. Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set for one frame area 117 or 118 regardless of whether or not it is in a state where the drawing data is displayed.

(29) When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, they may be hidden behind the center frame 42 and invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, no image is displayed on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. A configuration may be adopted in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set. Further, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the same color display is performed on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and the same color display is performed in one frame region 117 and 118. It is also possible to set both the first drawing data and the second drawing data for performing the above. In this case, the same color information (numerical information) is set for the entire dots in the frame areas 117 and 118 of one.

(30) A configuration in which only the first drawing data is set in one of the frame regions 117 and 118 at predetermined drawing timings, and only the second drawing data is set in the one frame regions 117 and 118 at other drawing timings. good too. In this case, a part of the frame areas 117 and 118 may be used to set the first drawing data, and the other area may be used to set the second drawing data. At the drawing timing for setting one drawing data, the first drawing data is set over the entire one frame area 117, 118, and at the drawing timing for setting the second drawing data, the second drawing data is set. may be set over the entire frame areas 117 and 118 of .

(31) By inputting one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the first drawing data is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to one dot in the second drawing data is output. The configuration is not limited to output to the second sub-display device 44, and an image signal corresponding to a plurality of dots in the first drawing data is output to the first sub-display device 43 by inputting one pulse of the clock signal. Also, an image signal corresponding to a plurality of dots in the second drawing data may be output to the second sub-display device 44 . Further, the first drawing data and the second drawing data may differ in the number of dots to which the image signal is to be output by inputting one pulse of the clock signal.

Further, by inputting one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the first drawing data is output to the first sub-display device 43, and by inputting the next one pulse, one dot in the second drawing data is output. may be configured such that an image signal corresponding to is output to the second sub-display device 44 . In this case, although the time required to complete the output of the image signals for all dots in the first drawing data and the second drawing data is longer, the output of the image signals to the first sub-display device 43 and the It is possible to alternately output the image signal to the display device 44 .

(32) The number of dots may differ between the first drawing data and the second drawing data. In this case, in a situation where both the first drawing data and the second drawing data include dots for which the output of the image signal has not been completed, the output of the image signal to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display are performed. The output of the image signal to the device 44 is alternately performed, and after the output of the image signal of the side with the smaller number of dots of the first drawing data and the second drawing data is completed, the output of the image signal of the side with the larger number of dots is output. A configuration in which only the output is repeated may be employed.

(33) The main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 are all the target display devices for which the image data to be used are collectively set in one drawing list. There is no limitation, and the targets to be collectively set may be the main display device 41 and the first sub-display device 43, or may be the main display device 41 and the second sub-display device 44. , the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 . In a configuration in which four or more display devices are provided, image data corresponding to four or more display devices may be collectively set in one drawing list.

(34) The configuration in which the display order priority data is also used as information for designating the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set in the drawing list is not limited. , 44 may be set in the drawing list. In this case, for example, the same display order priority data among the image data group corresponding to the main display device 41, the image data group corresponding to the first sub-display device 43, and the image data group corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 is displayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which there is image data in which is set. In this configuration, the order of use of image data is set in advance according to the types of display devices 41, 43, and 44, such as main display device 41→first sub-display device 43→second sub-display device 44. Even if the same display order priority data exists among different display devices 41, 43 and 44, each image data can be used sequentially.

(35) Display target data and display order data are set in the execution target table for display control, and the configuration is limited to that display order priority data is derived from the display target data and display order data. Instead, the display order priority data may be set in the execution target table for display control. In this case, the processing load can be reduced in that it is not necessary to derive the display order priority data from the display target data and the display order data.

(36) The display contents of the rotation period image 153 are not limited to those in the above embodiment, and are arbitrary. The same color display may be performed over the entire display device 44, and a geometric pattern may be displayed over the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44. may be

(37) During the period when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 display an image having vertical and horizontal directions, and the image is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed without following the rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 so that the player recognizes that it is displayed on the non-rotating surface. For example, at least one of a character image and a background image is displayed over the entirety of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, and the image is displayed along with the rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. may be configured to continue to be displayed in the same range while maintaining vertical and horizontal directionality regardless. This makes it difficult for the player watching the image to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

(38) When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 slide horizontally or vertically in front of the main display device 41, the entire main display device 41, first sub-display device 43 and second sub-display device 44 The image may be displayed over the sub-display devices 43 and 44 without following the slide movement so that the player recognizes that the image is displayed on the fixed surface. For example, at least one of a character image and a background image is displayed over the entirety of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, and the image is displayed when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 slide. may be configured to continue to be displayed in the same range while maintaining vertical and horizontal directionality regardless. This makes it difficult for the player watching the image to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are sliding.

(39) The display period of the image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are moving is not limited to the rotation period during which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate. Alternatively, for example, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 may continue to slide from the initial position until the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are positioned at the separation position. As a result, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 can be displaced from the initial position to the separated position without the player noticing, and the player can be given an unexpected feeling.

(40) The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of displaceable sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided, and a configuration in which only one is provided, or a configuration in which three or more are provided may be employed. .

(41) The sub-display devices 43 and 44 may be configured so as to be able to make one turn or more in a predetermined direction with the direction in which the display surface of the main display device 41 faces as the axis of rotation.

(42) In the configuration in which the second operation port 34 is provided in the right side area of the game area PA, and the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area in the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode Also, the configuration may be such that the sub-side hitting-to-right notification image 143 is displayed.

(43) The rotation speed of the hitting-right notification image 143 on the sub side is changed according to the rotation mode of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, but the rotation speed of the hitting-right notification image 143 on the sub side is not changed. may be

(44) During the execution period of the displacement rendering of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 may be displayed even in an area of the main display device 41 that can face the sub-display devices 43 and 44. . In this case, it is possible to secure a large area in which the abnormality notification image 176 can be displayed.

(45) When a notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, abnormal notification corresponding to the notification target event according to the order of occurrence of the notification target event regardless of the priority of the notification target event The image 176 may be configured to be displayed sequentially. Further, instead of this configuration, when a notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the notification target event is processed according to the priority of the notification target event regardless of the order of occurrence of the notification target event. A configuration may be adopted in which the corresponding abnormality notification images 176 are sequentially displayed.

(46) When a predetermined notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event is displayed on the main display device 41 and the sub The display devices 43 and 44 may be configured to return to their initial positions. This makes it possible to draw attention to the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the main display device 41 .

(47) When a predetermined notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event is displayed on the sub display device 43 instead of the main display device 41. , 44 may be used. This makes it possible to make the abnormality notification image 176 stand out.

(48) A configuration may be adopted in which only 3D images using 3D image data are displayed. In this case, all the image data corresponding to each of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged in a common world coordinate system, and from that state the drawing for the main display device 41 is performed. Data, drawing data for the first sub-display device 43, and drawing data for the second sub-display device 44 may be created separately. This eliminates the need to individually prepare the world coordinate system corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, so that the processing load can be reduced.

(49) Although the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, instead of this, a single camera (viewpoint) is set for all image data arranged in the world coordinate system. A configuration in which cameras are set in common may be adopted. Also, the configuration may be such that color information such as texture mapping is set before projection.

(50) Based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, instead of the configuration in which the production control device 80 is controlled by the distribution control board 71, based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the production control The device 80 may be configured to control the distribution control board 71 . Also, instead of the configuration in which the distribution control board 71 and the effect control device 80 are provided separately, these may be provided as a single control device, one of which functions is the main control device 60 , or both of these functions may be integrated in main controller 60 .

(51) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a first storage means (memory module 83) for pre-storing information;
a second storage means (VRAM 86) for storing information read from the first storage means;
storage identifying means for identifying whether or not the predetermined information that is the target of the transfer instruction is stored in the second storage means (function for executing the processes of steps S1007 and S1008 in the advance transfer control section 94);
When the storage identification means identifies that the predetermined information is not stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is transferred from the first storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means. If the storage specification means specifies that the predetermined information is transferred from the first storage means, the transfer execution means (preceding transfer control unit 94 executes the processing of steps S1009 and S1010 function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, the information stored in advance in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage means, so that when the information is to be used, it is not directly read out from the first storage means but stored in the second storage means. can be read from In this case, when the predetermined information is the target of the transfer instruction, if the predetermined information is not stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is read from the first storage means to the second storage means, If the predetermined information has already been stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is not transferred from the first storage means. As a result, even though the predetermined information has already been stored in the second storage means, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being further transferred from the first storage means. It is possible to improve the efficiency of reading information from.

Feature A2. a case where it is specified by the storage specifying means that the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means, and the storage area of the second storage means storing the predetermined information is the transfer instruction; If the storage area is a separate storage area different from the specified storage destination storage area, the specified information stored in the separate storage area is used to store the specified information in the storage destination storage area. The gaming machine according to feature A1, further comprising execution means (a function for executing the process of step S1011 in the preliminary transfer control section 94).

According to feature A2, when a transfer instruction is generated for the predetermined information already read out to the second storage means, the predetermined information is copied between the storage areas of the second storage means. This makes it possible to store the predetermined information in the storage area designated as the transfer instruction while eliminating the need to further read the predetermined information from the first storage means.

Feature A3. The storage identification means uses a search information group (search table 125) in which a correspondence relationship between the type of the storage area of the second storage means and the type of information stored in the storage area is set. , The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein it is specified whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature A3, by providing the search information group, it is possible to efficiently specify whether or not the predetermined information to be the target of the transfer instruction has already been read out to the second storage means. It becomes possible.

Feature A4. When the predetermined information is stored in the storage area of the storage destination specified by the transfer instruction in the second storage means, a correspondence relation between the type of the storage area of the storage destination and the type of the predetermined information is newly established. The game according to feature A3, characterized by comprising content update means (function for executing the processing of step S1012 in the advance transfer control unit 94) for updating the content of the search information group so that it is set to machine.

According to feature A4, when information is transferred to the storage area of the second storage means, the content of the search information group is updated so as to reflect the correspondence relationship between the storage area and the information. be. This makes it possible to make the contents of the search information group correspond to the latest storage state of the second storage means.

Feature A5. In the transfer instruction, identification information (address ID) for identifying an area in which the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means is included as information for causing the transfer execution means to identify the type of the predetermined information. provided,
The game according to feature A3 or A4, wherein the specifying information or information included in the specifying information is set as information for specifying the type of the predetermined information in the searching information group. machine.

According to feature A5, the information provided by the transfer instruction is set in the search information group. Thereby, when specifying whether or not the predetermined information, which is the target of the transfer instruction, is stored in the second storage means by using the search information group, the information provided in the transfer instruction can be used. It can be used as it is. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when performing the identification.

Feature A6. The identification information includes information corresponding to a start address of an area in which the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein information corresponding to the start address is set in the search information group as information for specifying the type of the predetermined information.

According to characteristic A6, since the information for specifying the type of the predetermined information in the search information group is the information corresponding to the start address, all addresses in the area where the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means In comparison with a configuration in which information corresponding to is included, it is possible to suppress the amount of information for specifying the type of predetermined information in the search information group, and the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means. It is possible to reduce the processing load when referring to the search information group in order to specify whether or not the

Feature A7. The predetermined information is information stored across a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means,
Characteristic A3, wherein the type information set for specifying the type of the storage area in the search information group is identification information for identifying the plurality of storage areas as a group of storage areas. The game machine according to any one of A6.

According to feature A7, since the plurality of storage areas in the second storage means are configured to be specified as a group of storage areas using identification information, it is possible to suppress the amount of type information in the search information group. becomes.

Feature A8. The second storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
The information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order, and in the next execution of the storage process after the information is stored in the storage area in the last order, the storage in the first order is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein information is stored in the area.

According to feature A8, since the storage area of the second storage means is looped as an execution target of storage processing, it is possible to make the storage capacity of the second storage means moderate. In addition, since the plurality of storage areas of the second storage means are sequentially subjected to storage processing according to a predetermined order, the processing configuration for specifying storage areas to be subjected to storage processing can be simplified. becomes possible.

Feature A9. The first storage means stores at least arbitrary information (image data for starting fluctuation) used by the control means when a predetermined event that can occur at any timing in a predetermined situation occurs,
In a situation in which the arbitrary information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the second storage means, the arbitrary information is stored in the predetermined situation so that the state in which the arbitrary information is stored in the second storage means is maintained in the predetermined situation. It is characterized by having a memory maintenance means (function for executing the processing of steps S903 to S906 in the performance CPU 82) that stores in the memory area that is the execution target of the memory processing in the second memory means. The gaming machine according to feature A8.

According to the feature A9, even if the storage area of the second storage means is configured to loop as a target of storage processing, the arbitrary information will continue to be stored in the second storage means in a predetermined situation. As a result, arbitrary information can be already read out to the second storage means at the timing when the predetermined event occurs, and the information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means at the timing when the predetermined event occurs. does not require the transfer of any information of In particular, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated storage area for storing arbitrary information in the second storage means, the degree of freedom in using the storage area of the second storage means is increased. be done.

Feature A10. The storage maintaining means stores the arbitrary information in the storage area, which is the object of the storage processing in the second storage means, by using the arbitrary information stored in the predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature A9.

According to feature A10, there is no need to periodically read the arbitrary information from the first storage means in order to keep the arbitrary information stored in the second storage means in a predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the arbitrary information stored in the second storage means in a predetermined situation while improving the information reading efficiency.

Feature A11. The second storage means has a speed required for reading information faster than reading from the first storage means,
The game machine is characterized by comprising control means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) that executes control using the information transferred to the second storage means. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature A11, the information is read out to the second storage means in which the speed required for reading the information is faster than when reading out from the first storage means, and the read information is used to perform control by the control means. By executing this, the time required for reading information in the control means can be shortened. In this case, the provision of the configuration described in the feature A1 or the like makes it possible to suitably transfer information to the second storage means.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A11, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a first storage means (memory module 83) for pre-storing control information;
a second storage means (VRAM 86) for storing the control information read from the first storage means;
Instruction control means (drawing CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list);
a transfer execution means (advance transfer control unit 94) that causes the control information specified in the instruction information to be read into the second storage means;
Control execution means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) that executes control using the control information according to the instruction information;
with
storage source information (address ID) for specifying an area in which the control information is stored in the first storage means is set in the instruction information provided from the instruction control means;
When the control information specified in the instruction information is read out to the second storage means by executing the transfer process using the storage source information, the transfer execution means 2 setting storage destination information (identification information) for specifying an area from which the control information is read in the storage means as the instruction information;
The control execution means utilizes the instruction information after the storage destination information is set by the transfer execution means to read the control information specified in the instruction information. A gaming machine characterized by reading out the control information from a storage area of a storage means.

According to the feature B1, when the control information is transferred to the second storage means according to the storage source information set in the instruction information, the second storage means stores the area where the control information is stored. Storage destination information is set in the instruction information. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to set both the storage source information and the storage destination information in the instruction information from the beginning, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the instruction information transmitted from the instruction control means. Further, when the control information is actually transferred to the second storage means, the information corresponding to the area of the second storage means to which the control information is transferred is set in the instruction information as the storage destination information. It is possible to improve the reliability of the content of the destination information.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the transfer executing means sets the storage destination information by overwriting the storage source information of the instruction information.

According to the feature B2, when the control information is transferred according to the storage source information of the instruction information, the storage destination information corresponding to the area of the second storage means to which the control information was transferred is the storage source. It is set in the instruction information so as to overwrite the information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of instruction information provided to the control execution means after the transfer of the control information is completed.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the amount of information of the storage destination information is smaller than that of the storage source information.

According to feature B3, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the storage destination information is overwritten on the storage source information in the transfer executing means.

Feature B4. A storage area (pre-transfer storage area 121) for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means, and a storage area for storing the instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the transfer execution means has been completed ( The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that the post-transfer storage area 122) is distinguished from the storage area 122).

According to the feature B4, the storage area for storing the instruction information provided from the instruction control means and the instruction information for which the transfer of the control information is completed and the storage destination information is set is clearly distinguished. , it is possible to clearly distinguish these indication information.

Feature B5. Predetermined control information (decoded image data) not to be read out to the second storage means exists as the control information,
When the predetermined control information is set in the instruction information, the transfer execution means performs a process for reading out the predetermined control information into the second storage means and performs the above-mentioned processing as information corresponding to the predetermined control information. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that neither of the processes of setting the storage destination information to the instruction information is executed.

According to the feature B5, the storage destination information is not set in the instruction information in the transfer execution means for the predetermined control information that is not read out to the second storage means. It is possible to prevent useless execution in .

Feature B6. The second storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
Information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order,
The transfer executing means is
When transfer processing is executed using the storage source information in which the order of execution of the transfer processing is a predetermined order in the instruction information, the control information that is the target of execution of the transfer processing in the second storage means means for setting information corresponding to the area from which is read as the storage destination information in the instruction information (function for executing the process of step S1102 in the preliminary transfer control unit 94);
When the transfer process using the storage source information whose execution order of the transfer process is next to the predetermined order in the instruction information is executed, the second storage means corresponds to the predetermined order. means for setting information corresponding to the address difference of the area from which the control information corresponding to the next order with respect to the area from which the control information has been read is set in the instruction information as the storage destination information. (the function of executing the process of step S1103 in the advance transfer control unit 94);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B6, for the control information whose execution order of the transfer process in the instruction information is next to the predetermined order, information corresponding to the address difference is set as the storage destination information. , it is possible to suppress the information amount of the storage destination information set in the instruction information.

Feature B7. Predetermined control information is stored across a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means,
When the predetermined control information has been read into the plurality of storage areas by executing the transfer process using the storage source information, the transfer execution means divides the plurality of storage areas into a group. Characteristic features B1 to B1, characterized by comprising means for setting identification information for identifying a storage area in the instruction information as the storage destination information (function for executing the process of step S1102 in the preliminary transfer control unit 94). The gaming machine according to any one of B6.

According to feature B7, since the plurality of storage areas in the second storage means are configured to be identified as a group of storage areas using identification information, the amount of storage destination information set in the instruction information can be suppressed. becomes possible.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the characteristic group A and the characteristic group B, the following problems can be solved.

A pachinko game machine, a slot machine, and the like are known as a kind of game machine. These game machines are equipped with a control element such as a CPU and a read-only memory element such as a ROM, and a series of games are played based on the control element executing processing according to a program read from the read-only memory element. is controlled. It is also known that a control element, a read-only storage element, and the like are integrated into one chip.

A configuration using a control element for controlling sound output and display is also known. In this case, the operation of the device to be controlled is controlled based on the processing being executed by the control element according to the data read from the read-only storage element.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably read out information from the storage means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44);
image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
instruction control means (drawing CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of the image to be displayed on the display means;
display control means (rendering LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data in accordance with the content instructed in the instruction information;
with
The instruction control means includes a plurality of means for providing a plurality of pieces of instruction information (a function of executing the processes of steps S907 to S921 in the production CPU 82) for displaying an image at one update timing on the display means. A gaming machine characterized in that

According to feature C1, a plurality of pieces of instruction information may be provided to display an image at one update timing. As a result, the information amount of one piece of instruction information provided from the instruction control means becomes extremely large, or various information is mixed in one piece of instruction information, which increases the processing load of the display control means. It is possible to suitably provide the instruction information while suppressing the occurrence of events such as storage.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the multiple providing means sets the image data included in the first type and the image data included in the second type as objects to be used in the different instruction information. .

According to feature C2, image data use instruction information is set in separate instruction information according to the type of image data. As a result, the display control means only needs to execute processing corresponding to the type of instruction information. This eliminates the need for the display control means to perform the processing individually for each image data unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means.

Feature C3. The display control means is
first display control means (3D control unit 97) for displaying an image on the display means using data created based on arranging three-dimensional data as the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space;
A second display control means (2D control unit 96) for displaying an image on the display means using two-dimensional data that is not three-dimensional data;
with
The image data included in the first type is data used by the first display control means, and the image data included in the second type is data used by the second display control means. The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized by:

The display control means executes different processing depending on whether an image is displayed using three-dimensional image data or when displaying an image using two-dimensional image data. In this case, according to the feature C3, since the image data of three-dimensional data and the image data of two-dimensional data are not mixedly set in one piece of instruction information, the display control means controls the three-dimensional data and the two-dimensional data. It is possible to identify which of the two-dimensional data corresponds to each instruction information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means.

Feature C4. The instruction control means causes the display means to display the image at one update timing when a predetermined number or more of the image data are used to display the image at one update timing on the display means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the number of the instruction information to be provided is increased compared to the case where less than a predetermined number of the image data is used for each game.

According to feature C4, it is possible to prevent the number of image data set as use targets from becoming extremely large in one piece of instruction information. As a result, the information amount of one piece of instruction information provided from the instruction control means can be suppressed to some extent, and the transmission period of one piece of instruction information can be prevented from becoming extremely long. .

Feature C5. When providing a plurality of the instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing on the display means, the plurality of providing means collectively uses the plurality of instruction information for displaying the image at one update timing. Aggregate information setting means for setting information indicating that it is information to be displayed (function for executing the processing of steps S912 and S918 in the production CPU 82 in the first embodiment, step in the production CPU 82 in the fourth embodiment The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S2506 to S2507 and steps S2513 to S2514.

According to feature C5, even when a plurality of pieces of instruction information are provided to display an image at one update timing, the display control means can be used to collectively use the plurality of pieces of instruction information. Information for enabling identification is set by the instruction control means. This enables the display control means to recognize that the plurality of pieces of instruction information are for displaying an image at one update timing.

Feature C6. When the first instruction information and the second instruction information are provided as the instruction information for displaying the image at one update timing on the display means, the display control means controls the display means to display the first instruction information and the second instruction information. The game according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that it comprises aggregating means for aggregating information into one piece of instruction information (a function of executing the processing of step S2607 in the advance transfer control unit 94). machine.

According to feature C6, even if a plurality of pieces of instruction information are provided to the display control means in order to display an image at one update timing, the display control means aggregates the plurality of pieces of instruction information into one piece of instruction information. be done. This eliminates the need to refer to a plurality of pieces of instruction information when the display control means executes display control according to the instruction information.

Feature C7. The display control means comprises transfer execution means (prior transfer control section 94) that causes the image data specified in the instruction information to be read out to the read storage means (VRAM 86),
The aggregating means combines the first instruction information and the second instruction information into one instruction information when the first instruction information and the second instruction information are subject to transfer processing by the transfer execution means. The gaming machine according to feature C6, which is characterized by consolidation.

According to the feature C7, the image data specified by the instruction information is read out in advance to the readout storage means, so that the processing speed when the image data is used in the display control means can be increased. In this case, a plurality of pieces of instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing are aggregated according to when the transfer processing by the transfer executing means is performed. It is possible to use it also as an opportunity to collect information.

Feature C8. The display control means comprises a plurality of instruction information storage areas (first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t before transfer) for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means,
When a plurality of pieces of instruction information are provided for displaying an image at one update timing on the display means, the plurality of pieces of instruction information are sequentially stored in a plurality of pieces of instruction information storage areas having consecutive addresses. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features C1 to C7.

According to feature C8, a plurality of pieces of instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing are stored in an instruction information storage area with consecutive addresses, so the processing configuration for reading the plurality of pieces of instruction information is simplified. It becomes possible to

For the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C8, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the characteristic group C, the following problems can be solved.

A pachinko game machine, a slot machine, and the like are known as a kind of game machine. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a first storage means (memory module 83) for pre-storing information;
a second storage means (VRAM 86) for storing information read from the first storage means;
Control means (production LSI 85) that executes control using the information read out to the second storage means;
with
A plurality of storage areas are provided in the second storage means, and address information is set in each of the plurality of storage areas,
The control means uses aggregation designation information (index number or identification information) for collectively designating a plurality of the storage areas which are part of the storage areas provided in the second storage means. and can read out information from the plurality of storage areas.

According to the feature D1, by using the aggregation designation information, it is possible to collectively read information from a plurality of storage areas corresponding to the aggregation designation information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information required to specify the storage area from which information is to be read, as compared with the case where address information is specified for each of the plurality of storage areas and information is read from the plurality of storage areas. becomes.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the address information corresponding to the target storage areas aggregated and designated by the aggregation designation information is continuous.

According to feature D2, it is possible to prevent the correspondence relationship between the aggregation designation information and the storage areas designated by it from becoming complicated.

Feature D3. The control means uses identification information different from the address information set in association with a part of the plurality of storage areas corresponding to the aggregation designation information to store the part. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein information can be read from the area.

According to feature D3, even when a plurality of storage areas are collectively designated using the aggregation designation information, information can be read from a portion of the plurality of storage areas. It becomes possible.

Feature D4. The control means is
reading means (transfer controller 92) for reading information from the storage area corresponding to the aggregation designation information in the second storage means;
Control execution means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) that instructs the reading means to read information and executes control using the information read by the reading means;
with
The readout means identifies the storage area corresponding to the readout instruction by the control execution means by using a correspondence relationship information group (index table 128) in which the correspondence relationship between the aggregation designation information and the address information is set. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized by:

According to the feature D4, by using the correspondence information group, it is possible to efficiently specify the type of the storage area corresponding to the aggregation designation information in the reading means.

Feature D5. The control means includes change means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2401 to S2403 in the preliminary transfer control section 94) capable of changing the relationship between the aggregation designation information and the plurality of storage areas. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized by:

According to feature D5, since the relationship between the aggregation designation information and a plurality of storage areas can be changed as needed, it is possible to flexibly use the aggregation designation of storage areas using the aggregation designation information. becomes.

Feature D6. The control means uses first collective designation information (index No. 1) for collectively designating a plurality of the storage areas which are part of the storage areas provided in the second storage means. and information can be read from the plurality of storage areas, and a part of the storage areas provided in the second storage means for collectively designating the plurality of storage areas. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein information can be read from the plurality of storage areas by using the second aggregation designation information (index No. 2).

According to feature D6, it is possible to distinguish the storage area of the second storage means into a plurality of aggregate areas. This makes it possible to set a plurality of aggregated areas according to the purpose.

Feature D7. Characteristic feature D6, characterized in that the number of storage areas specified by the first aggregation specifying information and the number of storage areas specified by the second aggregation specifying information can be different. game machine.

According to feature D7, in a configuration in which a plurality of aggregated areas can be set according to purposes, the degree of freedom in setting each aggregated area can be increased.

Note that for the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the characteristic group D, the following problems can be solved.

A pachinko game machine, a slot machine, and the like are known as a kind of game machine. These game machines are equipped with a control element such as a CPU and a read-only memory element such as a ROM, and a series of games are played based on the control element executing processing according to a program read from the read-only memory element. is controlled. It is also known that a control element, a read-only storage element, and the like are integrated into one chip.

A configuration using a control element for controlling sound output and display is also known. In this case, the operation of the device to be controlled is controlled based on the processing being executed by the control element according to the data read from the read-only memory element.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably read out information from the storage means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44);
image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
instruction control means (drawing CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of the image to be displayed on the display means;
display control means (rendering LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data in accordance with the content instructed in the instruction information;
with
The display control means is
first control means (prior transfer control section 94) for executing first control necessary for displaying an image on the display means in accordance with predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means;
a second control means (2D control section 96, 3D control section 97) for executing a second control necessary for displaying an image on the display means according to the predetermined instruction information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, the control means for executing the first control according to predetermined instruction information and the control means for executing the second control according to the predetermined instruction information are separately provided for the first control means and the second control means. It is This makes it possible to distribute the processing load compared to a configuration in which both the first control and the second control are collectively executed by one control means.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the second control means executes the second control according to the predetermined instruction information after the first control is executed by the first control means. .

According to feature E2, the predetermined instruction information is sequentially used in the first control means and the second control means. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects without providing a plurality of pieces of the same instruction information from the instruction control means.

Feature E3. reading storage means (VRAM 86) for storing the image data read from the image information storage means;
The first control means causes the image data set to be used in the predetermined instruction information to be in a state of being read out to the readout storage means,
The second control means causes the display means to display an image on the basis of using the image data read out to the readout storage means in accordance with the contents instructed in the predetermined instruction information. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized by:

According to feature E3, the control of reading out the image data to the storage means according to the predetermined instruction information is performed by the first control means, and the control of displaying the image by using the image data according to the predetermined instruction information is performed by the second control. done in means. In this case, in a configuration in which the processing load is distributed between the first control means and the second control means, it is possible to clearly differentiate the control contents executed by the first control means and the second control means respectively. .

Feature E4. The first control means controls the display means to display an image on the display means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at a predetermined update timing. Characteristic feature E3, characterized in that the image data is read out to the readout storage means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for displaying the image at the update timing later than the update timing of game machine.

According to the feature E4, the image data to be used thereafter is read and stored under the control of the first control means independent of the period during which the process of displaying the image is being executed by the second control means. It becomes possible to transfer in advance to the means.

Feature E5. storage source information (address ID) for specifying an area in which the image data is stored in the image information storage means is set in the instruction information provided from the instruction control means;
When the image data specified in the instruction information is read out to the readout storage means by executing the transfer process using the storage source information, the first control means controls the readout storage means. setting storage destination information (identification information) for specifying an area from which the image data is read in the instruction information,
The second control means uses the instruction information after the storage destination information has been set by the first control means to read the image data specified in the instruction information. The game machine according to feature E3 or E4, wherein the image data is read out from the storage area of the storage means.

According to feature E5, when the image data is read and transferred to the storage means according to the storage source information set in the instruction information, the storage destination information for specifying the area where the image data is stored in the read storage means is It is set to the instruction information. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to set both the storage source information and the storage destination information in the instruction information from the beginning, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the instruction information transmitted from the instruction control means. Further, when the image data is actually transferred to the readout storage means, the information corresponding to the area of the readout storage means to which the image data was transferred is set in the instruction information as the storage destination information. It is possible to improve the reliability of

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the first control means sets the storage destination information so as to overwrite the storage source information of the instruction information.

According to feature E6, when image data is transferred according to the storage source information of the instruction information, the storage destination information corresponding to the area of the reading storage means to which the image data is transferred overwrites the storage source information. is set as the instruction information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of instruction information provided to the second control means after the transfer of the control information is completed.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to characteristic E6, wherein the amount of information of the storage destination information is smaller than that of the storage source information.

According to the feature E7, it is possible to reduce the processing load when overwriting the storage source information with the storage destination information in the first control means.

Feature E8. A storage area (pre-transfer storage area 121) for storing the instruction information provided from the instruction control means, and a storage area for storing the instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the first control means is completed. (storage area 122 for after transfer), and the gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7.

According to the feature E8, the storage area for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means and the instruction information for which the transfer of the image data is completed and the storage destination information is set is clearly distinguished. It is possible to clearly distinguish these pieces of instruction information.

Feature E9. The image data includes predetermined image data (decoded image data) that is not to be read out to the readout storage means,
When the predetermined image data is set in the instruction information as a target to be used, the first control means performs processing for reading the predetermined image data into the reading storage means and performs the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E8, characterized in that neither of the processes of setting the storage destination information to the instruction information is executed.

According to the feature E9, the storage destination information is not set in the instruction information in the first control means for the predetermined image data that is not to be read out to the readout storage means. It is possible to prevent useless execution in .

Feature E10. The reading storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
Information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order,
The first control means is
When transfer processing using the storage source information in which the order of execution of the transfer processing is a predetermined order in the instruction information is executed, the image data targeted for execution of the transfer processing is read in the reading storage means. means for setting information corresponding to the outputted area to the instruction information as the storage destination information (function for executing the process of step S1102 in the preliminary transfer control unit 94);
In the instruction information, when the transfer process using the storage source information whose execution order of the transfer process is next to the predetermined order is executed, the reading storage means corresponds to the predetermined order. Means for setting information corresponding to the address difference of the area from which the image data was read corresponding to the next order with respect to the area from which the image data was read as the storage destination information in the instruction information (preliminary transfer a function of executing the processing of step S1103 in the control unit 94);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E10, for image data whose transfer processing execution order in the instruction information is next to the predetermined order, information corresponding to the address difference is set as the storage destination information. It is possible to suppress the information amount of the storage destination information set in the instruction information.

Feature E11. The specific image data is stored across a plurality of storage areas in the reading storage means,
When the specific image data has been read into the plurality of storage areas by executing transfer processing using the storage source information, the first control means stores the plurality of storage areas as a group of storage areas. Characteristics E5 to E10 characterized in that means for setting identification information for identifying the area as the storage destination information in the instruction information (function for executing the process of step S1102 in the preliminary transfer control unit 94). The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to feature E11, since a plurality of storage areas in the read storage means are configured to be specified as a group of storage areas using identification information, the amount of storage destination information set in the instruction information can be suppressed. It becomes possible.

For the configuration of any one of features E1 to E11, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44);
image information storage means (memory module 83) storing image data in advance;
Display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means using the image data;
with
In the image information storage means, reference data (I picture data) and does not include difference data (B picture data, P picture data) capable of providing a difference with respect to the reference data when the decoding process is executed (special video data 185 ) is stored.

According to the feature F1, since the special moving image data including the reference data without including the difference data is provided, the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data can be normally The image quality can be higher than that of the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to handle image data having image quality equivalent to that of normal still image data as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to use image data having the same image quality as that of the normal still image data without using an area for reading the normal still image data.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the special moving image data includes a plurality of the reference data.

According to the feature F2, by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, it is possible to create a plurality of pieces of image data whose image quality is approximately the same as that of normal still image data.

Feature F3. The game according to feature F2, wherein the plurality of decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data are used in accordance with the order of use determined in the special moving image data. machine.

According to feature F3, when using a plurality of pieces of decoded image data created from special moving image data, there is no need to set the order of use separately from the special moving image data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting the order of use of the image data, compared to the configuration in which the decoded image data is pre-stored in the image information storage means as normal still image data.

Feature F4. Decoding means (moving image decoder 95) for executing the decoding process on the special moving image data,
The decoding means reproduces the special moving image in a situation in which the display control means is executing a process for displaying an image at an update timing prior to an update timing at which an image using the decoded image data is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the decoding process is performed on data.

According to the feature F4, during a period in which the display control means is executing processing for displaying an image using other image data, the special moving image is generated by the decoding means provided separately from the display control means. A decoding process of the image data is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period during which the decoding process is being executed from becoming an image display waiting period while preventing an increase in the processing load on the display control means.

Feature F5. The image information storage means stores attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data,
The gaming machine comprises decoding means (video decoder 95) for executing the decoding process on the special image data,
The decoding means executes the decoding process on the special moving image data in a situation where the display control means is executing a process for displaying an image using the attached image data. The game machine according to any one of F1 to F4.

According to the feature F5, the decoding process of the special moving image data is executed in a situation where the process for displaying the image using the attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data is executed. It is possible to execute the decoding process of the special moving image data using the period during which the process for displaying the image corresponding to is executed.

Feature F6. The attached image data displays an image corresponding to an update timing immediately before the image displayed using the decoded image data to be used first among the decoded image data created from the special moving image data. The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that the image data is for making the game play.

According to the feature F6, in the configuration in which the decoding process of the special moving image data is performed using the period during which the process for displaying the image using the attached image data is being performed, the attached image data is used for display. It is possible to ensure continuity between the image displayed using the decoded image data and the image displayed using the decoded image data.

Feature F7. The display control means includes a predetermined process execution means (step S810 in the 3D control section 97) for displaying an image corresponding to the predetermined image data by executing a predetermined process on the predetermined image data stored in the image information storage means. function to execute the processing of
When displaying an image corresponding to the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, the predetermined process executing means executes the predetermined process on the decoded image data. is the configuration,
When the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is read from the image information storage means to read storage means (VRAM 86, register 93),
The reading storage means is characterized by comprising a first reading area (VRAM 86) for storing the predetermined image data and a second reading area (register 93) for reading the decoded image data. A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6.

According to feature F7, when image data is used in the display control means, the image data is not used directly from the image information storage means, but is used after being read out once to the readout storage means. Therefore, by reading the image data into the reading storage means in advance, the image data can be immediately used when the image data is used in the display control means. Further, the reading storage means is provided with a first reading area from which predetermined image data is read and a second reading area from which decoded image data of the special moving image data is read. Then, the reading area is set, and when the image data is used in the display control means, it becomes possible to designate the area according to the type of the image data.

In this case, the special image data having the configuration of the feature F1 and not containing the difference data is stored in the image information storage means. As a result, since the special image data is read out not in the first readout area but in the second readout area, there is no need to secure an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the first readout area.

Feature F8. a plurality of types of the predetermined image data are stored in the image information storage means;
The game machine is
a first read execution means for reading all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data into the first read area when a predetermined read timing has come;
In a situation where decoded image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second readout area, the decoded image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second readout area. a second reading execution means for overwriting the decoded image data already stored in the second reading area with the decoded image data,
The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F8, since all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read into the first readout area, it is not necessary to read out the predetermined image data as needed. On the other hand, the decoded image data is read into the second readout area as necessary, and when new decoded image data is created, the second readout area is overwritten. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the second readout area. In this case, the special image data having the configuration of the feature F1 and not containing the difference data is stored in the image information storage means. As a result, since the special image data is read out not in the first readout area but in the second readout area, there is no need to secure an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the first readout area.

Feature F9. The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the first reading executing means reads all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data to the first reading area when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to quickly create a state in which all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read out to the first readout area.

Feature F10. Any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used for displaying a three-dimensional image. The game machine described.

According to the feature F10, it is possible to obtain excellent effects as already described when texture data is used.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F10, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. display means for displaying images (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44);
image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
Rendering data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (sub-first frame area 117, sub-second frame area 118), and an image signal corresponding to the rendering data is displayed on the display means. Display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the output;
In a game machine equipped with
A first display means (first sub-display device 43) and a second display means (second sub-display device 44) are provided as the display means,
The display control means creates first drawing data for displaying an image on the first display means in a partial area of the storage means for setting, and creates first drawing data for displaying an image on the second display means. 2. Consolidation setting means for setting drawing data in another area of the setting storage means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing drawing processing to the drawing area for sub-display in the 2D control unit 96; A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing drawing data synthesizing processing for sub-display in a 3D control unit 97 in a form.

According to feature G1, the first drawing data for displaying an image on the first display means and the second drawing data for displaying an image on the second display means are created in the same setting storage means. As a result, even when there are a plurality of display means, the number of setting storage means can be reduced, and image display on a plurality of display means can be achieved while simplifying the hardware configuration for accessing the setting storage means. Realization is possible.

Feature G2. A partial area of the setting storage means for creating the first drawing data is defined as a first setting area (area of odd lines), and the setting storage means for creating the second drawing data. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the other area is set in the second set area (even-numbered line area).

According to feature G2, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the area in which the first drawing data is set is fixed in the setting storage means. At the same time, the area in which the second drawing data is set is fixed in the setting storage means. This eliminates the need to allocate areas in the setting storage means each time the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature G3. The first drawing portion data forming part of the first drawing data exists between a plurality of second drawing portion data forming a portion of the second drawing data, and the second drawing portion data is present among the plurality of said drawing portion data. The game machine according to feature G2, wherein the arrangement order of the data in the setting storage means is set so as to exist between the first drawing portion data.

According to feature G3, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, each of the first drawing data and the second drawing data is stored in the entire setting storage means. It is possible to set by distributing to

Feature G4. The game machine according to feature G3, wherein the first drawing portion data and the second drawing portion data are alternately arranged in at least a predetermined direction data arrangement order in the setting storage means.

According to feature G4, by arranging the first drawing portion data and the second drawing portion data alternately, it is only necessary to set each drawing portion data as an output target of an image signal in accordance with the order in which they are arranged in a predetermined direction. , the image signal can be alternately output to the first display means and the second display means.

Feature G5. According to any one of the characteristics G1 to G4, the aggregation setting means sets both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to the setting storage means. The game machine described.

According to feature G5, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the period for creating the first drawing data and the period for creating the second drawing data are separated. Duplication is possible.

Feature G6. The aggregation setting means is characterized in that both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be used at the same update timing are set in the setting storage means. The game machine according to feature G5.

In feature G6, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the images of both the first display means and the second display means are updated at one update timing. It becomes possible to

Feature G7. The display control means controls the image signal corresponding to the first drawing unit data constituting a part of the first drawing data and the part of the second drawing data based on the occurrence of the signal output opportunity once. and the image signal corresponding to the second drawing unit data constituting the feature G1 to G6. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature G7, both the output of the image signal to the first display means and the output of the image signal to the second display means are performed based on the occurrence of the signal output opportunity once. Thus, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the updating of the image on the first display means and the update of the image on the second display means are started at the same time. It becomes possible to proceed at the same time.

Feature G8. The game according to feature G7, wherein the first drawing unit data is the minimum unit data in the first drawing data, and the second drawing unit data is the minimum unit data in the second drawing data. machine.

According to the feature G8, in the configuration in which both the output of the image signal to the first display means and the output of the image signal to the second display means are performed based on the occurrence of the signal output opportunity once, the image Since the data to be output of the signal is the data of the minimum unit, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the image signal output process for one signal output trigger from becoming extremely long.

Characteristic G9. The first drawing unit data and the second drawing unit data to be output of the image signal by one signal output opportunity are set in the order in which the data are arranged in the setting storage means so as to be adjacent to each other. The gaming machine according to feature G7 or G8, characterized in that

According to the feature G9, by setting the adjacent drawing unit data in the setting storage means as the output target of the image signal for one signal output opportunity, the first display means can be displayed for one signal output opportunity. It is possible to output both the image signal of the second display means and the image signal output to the second display means.

Feature G10. the first drawing data is created using the image data read from the image information storage means for creating the first drawing data;
The second drawing data according to any one of features G1 to G9, wherein the second drawing data is created using the image data read from the image information storage means for creating the second drawing data. game machine.

According to the feature G10, the first drawing data is individually created using the image data, and the second drawing data is individually created using the image data. This eliminates the need to previously store image data for simultaneously creating both the first drawing data and the second drawing data in the image information storage means.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G10, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44);
image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
instruction control means (drawing CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of the image to be displayed on the display means;
Storage means for setting the image data according to the contents instructed in the instruction information (main first frame area 114, main second frame area 115, sub first frame area 117, sub second frame area 118) ), display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means,
In a game machine equipped with
A first display means (first sub-display device 43) and a second display means (second sub-display device 44) are provided as the display means,
The instruction control means provides, as the instruction information, information designating the image data to be used for displaying the image on the first display means and information for designating the image data to be used for displaying the image on the second display means. 35. A gaming machine capable of providing aggregation instruction information (drawing list shown in FIG. 35) in which both of the information specifying the image data are aggregated and set.

According to the feature H1, information for displaying images on a plurality of display means is provided to the display control means in a state where the information is aggregated into the aggregation instruction information. This makes it possible to reduce the number of instruction information provided from the instruction control means to the display control means, compared to a configuration in which instruction information is individually provided for each of the plurality of display means.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein information for displaying an image on each of the first display means and the second display means at the same update timing is set in the aggregation instruction information. .

According to feature H2, information for displaying an image on each display unit at the same update timing is aggregated and set in the aggregation instruction information. can be treated as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and there is no need to execute processing for determining which update timing of a plurality of different update timings the information corresponds to. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the process executed by the display control means using the aggregation instruction information.

Feature H3. a plurality of image data are specified as objects to be used in the instruction information;
The display control means stores the plurality of image data specified as use targets in the instruction information in the order according to setting order information (display order priority data) set in the instruction information. It is a configuration in which the means are sequentially set,
In the aggregation instruction information, the order of setting determines whether the image data designated as the object to be used is data for displaying an image on which of the first display means and the second display means. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the designation is made using information.

According to feature H3, it is possible to determine to which display means the image data designated to be used corresponds by using the setting order information for specifying the setting order of the image data by the display control means. identified. As a result, there is no need to set dedicated information for designating the type of display means to be set in the aggregation instruction information, so it is possible to reduce the number of types of information set in the aggregation instruction information. .

Feature H4. In the aggregation instruction information, the setting order information corresponding to the image data to be used for displaying the image on the first display means is the information group in the first order range (the first display target reference value or more and The setting order information corresponding to the image data included in the second display target reference value) and used to display the image on the second display means in the aggregation instruction information is the second order range (a value equal to or greater than the second display target reference value), the gaming machine according to feature H3.

According to feature H4, in the configuration for specifying the type of display means to be set using the setting order information, the setting order is to determine which display means the image data designated as the object to be used corresponds to. Distinguished in information. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the type of display means to be set in the display control means.

Feature H5. The instruction control means includes an instruction information creation means (function for executing drawing list creation processing in the production CPU 82) that creates the instruction information by referring to a reference information group (execution target table for display control),
The reference information group includes type information (display target data) corresponding to the type of display means to be displayed as information for specifying the type of the image data to be used in the instruction information generating means; Individual order information (display order data) corresponding to the setting order in the setting storage means is set for the plurality of types of image data to be used on the display means to be displayed,
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, wherein the instruction information creating means derives the setting order information based on the type information and the individual order information.

According to the characteristic H5, the setting order information is not set as it is in the reference information group, but the type information and the individual order information are set. is derived. As a result, when setting the reference information group at the game machine design stage, it is sufficient to set only the type of display means to be set and the order of setting among the plurality of types of image data to be used in the display means. , there is no need to set the final set order information. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated.

Feature H6. The instruction information creating means executes predetermined arithmetic processing (processing of step S1305 and step S1306 in the performance CPU 82) using the numerical information corresponding to the type information on the numerical information corresponding to the individual order information. The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein numerical information derived by the predetermined arithmetic processing is used as the setting order information.

According to the feature H6, when the setting order information is derived using the type information and the individual order information set in the reference information group, the type information and the individual order information are used to execute a predetermined arithmetic process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the setting order information.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H6, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature group E, the feature group F, the feature group G, and the feature group H, the following problems can be solved.

A pachinko game machine, a slot machine, and the like are known as a kind of game machine. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. predetermined display means for displaying images (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44);
displacement drive control means for displacing the predetermined display means (function for executing the process of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73);
Display control means (CPU 82 for production, LSI 85 for production) that executes display control of the predetermined display means;
with
The display control means controls a displacement-corresponding image (rotation period image 153) that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement motion in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement motion. ) is displayed on the predetermined display means (the function of executing the processing of steps S1810 to S1812 in the production CPU 82, the 2D control unit 96, the 3D control unit 97). machine.

According to feature I1, the predetermined display means displays a displacement corresponding image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement motion in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement motion. be. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the predetermined display means is displaced without the player being aware of it, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature I2. the predetermined displacement operation is a predetermined rotation operation in the predetermined display means;
The game machine according to feature I1, wherein the displacement-corresponding image is an image having no directivity in a direction along the display surface of the predetermined display means.

According to feature I2, since the displacement-corresponding image is an image having no directivity in the direction along the display surface of the predetermined display means, when the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined rotating operation, the predetermined display means By displaying the displacement corresponding image, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is rotating.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the displacement-corresponding image is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed on a non-displacement display surface.

According to the feature I3, the displacement-corresponding image is displayed in such a way that the player recognizes that it is displayed on the non-displaced display surface. It is possible to make identification difficult.

More specifically, regarding the configuration of feature I3, "the displacement-corresponding image is a member that does not follow the predetermined display means around the predetermined display means when the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. is displayed in such a way that the orientation of the display is not changed in relation to".

Feature I4. A specific display means (main display device 41) for displaying an image is provided,
The predetermined display means displays the display surface of the specific display means and the display surface of the predetermined display means from the front of the game machine at a position facing a part of the display surface of the specific display means in the direction in which the display surface faces. is configured to perform the predetermined displacement operation in a predetermined posture in which both are visible,
The displacement-corresponding control means displays the displacement-corresponding image in a region existing around the display surface of the predetermined display means on the display surface of the specific display means when the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that an image corresponding to is displayed.

According to feature I4, in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined displacement operation, a part of the display surface of the specific display means exists around the display surface of the predetermined display means, and a part of the display surface An image corresponding to the displacement-corresponding image on the predetermined display means is displayed in the area of . As a result, it is possible to display an image having relevance to the displacement-corresponding image displayed on the predetermined display means around the predetermined display means performing the predetermined displacement operation, and the predetermined display means and the specific display means , it is possible to perform an integrated display effect.

Feature I5. The predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacing operation in a situation where the display surface of the specific display means is arranged over the entire circumference of the display surface of the predetermined display means. The gaming machine according to feature I4.

According to feature I5, it is possible for the player to have the illusion that the display surface of the predetermined display means is a part of the display surface of the specific display means. This makes it easier to display an image that makes it difficult for people to recognize it.

Feature I6. The predetermined correspondence control means, when the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement operation, sets the displacement correspondence image so as to straddle the boundary between the display surface of the specific display means and the display surface of the predetermined display means. The game machine according to feature I4 or I5, characterized in that images having continuity are displayed on the specific display means and the predetermined display means.

According to feature I6, since the image of the specific display means displayed around the predetermined display means and the image displayed on the predetermined display means are displayed so as to have continuity, attention should be paid to these images. It becomes difficult for the player who is there to recognize that the predetermined display means is displacing.

Feature I7. The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the predetermined display means is arranged differently at the timing of starting the predetermined displacing motion and the timing of ending the predetermined displacing motion.

According to feature I7, in a situation where a displacement-corresponding image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is displacing is displayed, the predetermined display means is displaced and the predetermined display means is arranged. are different, it is expected that the player will recognize that the arrangement state of the predetermined display means has been changed without realizing it, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Feature I8. The display control means displays an image (side-by-side installation period image 152) on the predetermined display means so that the player can easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means before the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. and means for causing the predetermined display means to display an image (separation period image 154) that allows the player to easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means after the predetermined display means has performed the predetermined displacing operation. The gaming machine according to feature I7, characterized by comprising a function for executing the processes of steps S1806 to S1808 and steps S1814 to S1816 in the CPU 82, a 2D control unit 96, and a 3D control unit 97).

According to feature I8, before and after the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation, the predetermined display means displays an image that allows the player to easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means, and the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. is being performed, a displacement-corresponding image is displayed on the predetermined display means so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement motion. This makes it possible to give the player a strong impression that the layout state of the predetermined display means has been changed without realizing it.

Feature I9. A first display means (first sub-display device 43) and a second display means (second sub-display device 44) are provided as the predetermined display means,
The displacement drive control means causes the first display means and the second display means to start the predetermined displacement operation in a state in which the first display means and the second display means are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction. The game according to any one of features I1 to I8, characterized in that the predetermined displacing motion is terminated in a state in which the first display means and the second display means are arranged side by side in a direction different from the predetermined direction. machine.

According to feature I9, the direction in which the first display means and the second display means are arranged side by side differs before and after the predetermined displacement operation. In this case, by displaying the displacement-corresponding image in a situation where the predetermined displacement action is being performed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the first display means and the second display means are performing the predetermined displacement action. . As a result, it is expected that the player will recognize that the orientation of the first display means and the second display means has been changed without realizing it, and it is possible to provide the player with surprise.

Note that for the configuration of any one of the features I1 to I9, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. predetermined display means for displaying images (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44);
Rotation drive control means for rotating the predetermined display means (function for executing the process of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73);
Display control means (CPU 82 for production, LSI 85 for production) that executes display control of the predetermined display means;
with
The display control means causes the predetermined display means to display an annular notification image (right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side) in which notification character images are arranged in a ring (annular notification control means (right-handed notification in the production CPU 82). 2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97).

According to the feature J1, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpectedness by performing a rotating action on the predetermined display means, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. In this case, the notification character images are arranged in a circle. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the content of the notifying character image even in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a specific rotating motion.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the annular notification control means displays the annular notification image as if it is rotating.

According to feature J2, since the annular notification image is displayed as if it is rotating, the player can display the annular notification image in a predetermined display orientation regardless of the rotational position of the predetermined display means. can be visually recognized.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the annular notification control means changes the rotation display mode of the annular notification image according to the operation mode of the rotation operation of the predetermined display means.

According to the characteristic J3, since the rotational display mode of the annular notification image is changed according to the operation mode of the rotational movement in the predetermined display means, the circular notification image is displayed regardless of the mode of the rotational movement in the predetermined display means. It is possible to make the display content of the notification image easy for the player to recognize.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of features J1 to J3, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. a specific display means (main display device 41) for displaying an image;
predetermined display means for displaying images (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44);
Displacement control means for displacing the predetermined display means to a predetermined facing position facing a part of the display surface of the specific display means from the direction in which the display surface faces (function for executing the processing of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73 )When,
When an event to be notified occurs in a situation where control is executed by the displacement control means so that the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined facing position, the specific notification image (abnormality notification image 176) is displayed as the specific display. Notification control means (function for executing the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 in the production CPU 82, 2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) to be displayed on the means,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic K1, the specific notification image is displayed on the specific display means when the event to be notified occurs even in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at a predetermined facing position. . As a result, the specific notification image is displayed by the specific display means even if the predetermined display means cannot be arranged at the predetermined facing position due to some failure, and the specific notification image is displayed to the player or the manager of the game hall. It is possible to recognize.

Feature K2. The notification control means, when the event to be notified occurs in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined facing position, displays the notification in a region not facing the predetermined display means on the display surface of the specific display means. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein at least part of the specific notification image is displayed by pressing the button.

According to the feature K2, it is possible to prevent the specific notification image from being completely hidden by the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to ensure the visibility of the specific notification image displayed on the specific display means even in a situation where the specific display means is arranged at a predetermined facing position.

Feature K3. The displacement control means displaces the predetermined display means such that the predetermined facing position changes during a predetermined displacement period,
When the event to be notified occurs during the predetermined displacement period, the notification control means controls the display surface of the specific display means so as to display an image in a region that does not face the predetermined display means over the entire predetermined displacement period. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the specific notification image is displayed.

According to the feature K3, the specific notification image is displayed in a region that does not face the predetermined display means over the entire predetermined displacement period, so that the display position of the specific notification image is changed according to the position of the predetermined display means. It is possible to ensure the visibility of the specific notification image displayed on the specific display means without performing control such as changing the .

Feature K4. There are a plurality of types of the event to be reported,
A plurality of types of the specific notification image exist corresponding to the notification target event,
The features K1 to K3, wherein the notification control means limits the number of the specific notification images to be displayed to a predetermined number in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined facing position. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature K4, the number of specific notification images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number in a situation where the area for displaying the specific notification images on the specific display means is limited, so that the specific display means It is possible to ensure a certain size of the specific notification image to be displayed.

Feature K5. A priority for displaying the specific notification image is set for the plurality of types of notification target events,
The notification control means, when the number of the notification target events exceeding the predetermined number occurs in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined facing position, the notification target of the higher priority side The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the specific notification image corresponding to the event is displayed.

According to the feature K5, even if the number of specific notification images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number in a situation where the predetermined display means are arranged at predetermined facing positions, the notification target on the side with the higher priority It is possible to display a specific notification image corresponding to the event.

Feature K6. The notification control means causes the predetermined display means to display a predetermined notification image (common notification image 175) when the notification target event occurs in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined facing position. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features K1 to K5.

According to the feature K6, not only the specific notification image is displayed on the specific display means, but also the predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that it is possible to emphasize the occurrence of the notification target event. Become.

Feature K7. The gaming machine according to feature K6, wherein the predetermined notification image is a common image that does not correspond to the type of the event to be notified.

According to the feature K7, the predetermined display means does not display an image corresponding to the type of the notification target event, but displays a common image that does not correspond to the type of the notification target event as the predetermined notification image. It is possible to reduce the processing load for causing the means to display the predetermined notification image.

Feature K8. The gaming machine according to feature K6 or K7, wherein the notification control means causes the predetermined display means to display only one predetermined notification image even if the number of occurrences of the event to be notified is plural. .

According to feature K8, even if the number of occurrences of the event to be notified is plural, only one predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that images other than the predetermined notification image are displayed on the predetermined display means. It is possible to secure a wide area where

Note that for the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K8, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the characteristic group I, the characteristic group J, and the characteristic group K, the following problems can be solved.

A pachinko game machine, a slot machine, and the like are known as a kind of game machine. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a certain period of time or after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine 41... Main display device 43... First sub-display device 44... Second sub-display device 73... Distribution side MPU 82... Production CPU 83... Memory module 85... Production LSI , 86... VRAM, 92... Transfer controller, 93... Register, 94... Pre-transfer controller, 95... Video decoder, 96... 2D controller, 97... 3D controller, 114... First frame area for main, 115... Main second frame area for sub 117 first frame area for sub 118 second frame area for sub 121 pre-transfer storage area 121a to 121t first to twentieth storage area before transfer 122 Post-transfer storage area 125 Search table 128 Index table 143 Sub-side right-handed notification image 152 Parallel setting period image 153 Rotation period image 154 Separation period image 175 --- Common notification image, 176 --- Abnormality notification image, 185 --- Special moving image data.

Claims (1)

display means for displaying an image;
image information storage means for storing image data in advance;
an instruction control means for providing instruction information for instructing the contents of an image to be displayed on the display means;
display control means for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data in accordance with the content instructed in the instruction information;
with
The display control means is
first control means for executing first control necessary for displaying an image on the display means in accordance with predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means;
a second control means for executing a second control necessary for displaying an image on the display means according to the predetermined instruction information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images